Dw windsor exterior lighting catalogue issue 4

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lighting | Issue 4

www.dwwindsor.com

www.dwwindsor.com

Contact numbersGeneral Enquiries:T: 01992 474600F: 01992 474601E: [email protected]

Dedicated product advice:E: [email protected]

If you have a question about our products please contact us using our dedicated email address for an answer within twenty-four hours (Monday to Friday)

Please open this fl ap for our handy guide to specifyingour products

Products at a glanceSee pages 4 - 5 for a visual indexof all our products

New productsSee pages 6 - 9 for some of ourlatest innovative products

Akord Bullet 86Akord Cone 86Anello LED 166Aventis 212Barosa 78Berkeley 118Braemar 138Camaro 66Cannon 244Capra 182Capra-Compact 184Capra-Mini 180Cassia LED 186Colada 248Colada LED 248Columns 256Corvus 104Cradle 98Crieff 102Dover 96DW400 146Ely 124Eton 244Evora 58Evora LED 62Excel 94Forza 88Garda 214Hatfi eld 132Henley 140Iffl ey 130Knightsbridge 114Kona 202Lago 226Lancaster 112LED Light Engine 32Light Point 168Luca 196Lyra 188Malo LED 194Manhattan 82Mano LED 190Meridian 148Milano 44

Monaro 52Monaro LED II 54Monza 192Newport 136Nexus 240Pall Mall 116Petra 176Pharola 228Pharola-Max 230Pharola-Wall 200Polar 98Polar (bollard) 242Portea LED 172Portland 118Reno 198Renza LED 174Riga 240Rio 80Road Lantern 144Rona 238Sabre 252Salisbury 136Silka 232Silka-Max 236Solar & Wind 152Sorento 74Strand A & A Plus 120Strand B & C 122Stratum 92Tatra 210Tizona 250Toro 150Toronto 84Trebem 224Vaio LED 160Vector 242Vertica 206Vertica LED 204Warwick 134Waterford 138Westminster 116Windsor 110York 134

Prod

uct

inde

x

DW Windsor Limited is a member of DW Group Holdings Limited © DW Windsor 2012

DW Windsor LightingPindar Road, HoddesdonHertfordshire. EN11 0DX

T: 01992 474600F: 01992 474601E: [email protected]

folds

folds

ContemporaryClassicTraditionalFunctionalSolar & WindArchitecturalLED HandrailIlluminated BollardsFloodlightingColumns & Brackets

DWW2012_Cover_OUTER_AW.indd 1 05/11/2012 11:59

dwwindsor.com | [email protected]

Light Solutions 1

dwwindsor.com | [email protected] | [email protected] LED Bankside, London

Light solutionsLight shapes our perception of the world.

As an international, award-winning designer and manufacturer of exterior lighting solutions and urban furniture, DW Windsor recognises that lighting specifiers require products which are both innovative and sustainable in their offering.

Combining style and quality with high performance, we have led the way in creating lighting solutions designed to enhance the environment. From traditional to contemporary or bespoke, we offer considerable breadth and depth of product choice, backed by the strongest environmental credentials.

2 Light Solutions

Welcome to DW WindsorOutstanding quality & service, every time

Contemporary | 42 LED Handrail | 214Classic | 90 Bollards | 222Traditional | 106 Floodlighting | 246Functional | 142 Columns | 256Solar & Wind | 152 How to Guides | 292Architectural | 158 Technical Info | 308

DW Windsor Light Solutions

1

Products at a Glance 4

NEW Products 6

In Recognition of our Commitment

10

How We Can Support You 12

Photometric Calculations Available Via DIALux

14

Providing the Highest Performing Products

15

Integrating Sphere 16

A Sure Test of Quality 17

White Light 18

CosmoPolis 20

StreetWise 22

Control & Dim 24

LeafNut 26

Diamond Optic® 28

LED Light Engine 32

LX1 Luminance Optic 34

Uniqute Solutions 36

Refurbishments & Replicas

38

Urban Furniture 40

Contemporary 42

Milano Introduction 44

Milano Curved Arms 46

Milano Straight Arms 48

Monaro Introduction 50

Monaro LED II 52

Monaro 54

Evora Introduction 58

Evora LED 60

Evora 62

Camaro Introduction 66

Camaro Design Philosophy

68

Camaro 72

Sorento Introduction 74

Sorento 76

Barosa 78

Rio 80

Manhattan 82

Toronto 84

Akord Bullet 86

Akord Cone 86

Forza 88

Classic 90

Stratum 92

Excel 94

Dover 96

Polar & Cradle 98

Technical Details (Optima Series)

100

Crieff 102

Corvus 104

Traditional 106

LED Light Engine 108

Windsor 110

Lancaster 112

Knightsbridge 114

Westminster & Pall Mall 116

Portland & Berkeley 118

Strand 120

Ely 124

Strand/Ely Technical 128

Iffley 130

Hatfield 132

York & Warwick 134

Salisbury & Newport 136

Braemar & Waterford 138

Henley 140

Functional 142

Road Lantern 144

DW400 146

Meridian 148

Toro 150

Solar & Wind 152

Lighting Powered by Nature

154

Stand-Alone & Grid Connected Systems

156

Architectural 158

Vaio LED Introduction 160

Vaio LED 164

Anello LED 166

Light Point 168

Portea LED 172

Renza LED 174

Petra 176

Capra Introduction 178

Capra-Mini 180

Capra 182

Capra-Compact 184

Cassia LED 186

Lyra 188

Mano LED 190

Monza 192

Malo LED 194

Luca 196

Reno 198

Pharola-Wall 200

Kona 202

Vertica LED 204

Vertica 206

Tatra 210

Aventis 212

Illuminated LED Handrail

214

Design Philosophy 216

Garda LED Handrail 218

How to Illuminate Areas using Garda LED Handrail

220

Illuminated Bollards 222

Trebem 224

Lago 226

Pharola 228

Pharola-Max 230

Silka 232

Silka-Max 236

Rona 238

Nexus & Riga 240

Polar & Vector 242

Cannon & Eton 244

Floodlighting 246

Colada LED 248

Colada 248

Tizona 250

Sabre 252

Floodlighting Brackets 254

Columns, Brackets, Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

256

Special Structures 258

Column Introduction 260

Standard Columns 262

Special Columns 266

Painting Columns & Brackets

270

Columns Technical Details

272

Raise & Lower Columns 274

Column Enhancements: Banners, Festive Decorations, Baskets and CCTV

276

Pedestals 278

Column Brackets 279

Finials 284

Wall Brackets 286

Feeder Pillars 289

EN 40 Column Standard 290

How-to Guides 292

Lighting Landscapes, the Vertical and Using In-ground Luminaires

294

Lighting Facades, Statues and Monuments

296

Lighting Pedestrian Crossings

298

Lighting Car Parks 302

Minimising Light Spill 304

Wildlife Considerations 306

Technical Information

308

CEN Code of Practice 310

WEEE Directive & Energy Related Products

312

Ingress Protection & Shock Resistance

313

Lamp Data 314

Glossary 316

Index 318

General Conditions of Trading

320

We strive to offer a comprehensive range of quality products and value-added services as standard.It’s always been our belief that lighting should be more than just functional illumination. After all, good lighting can help shape the character of an environment, by engaging and uplifting the people it touches.

That’s why we continually seek to work with our customers to look beyond pure aesthetics, sharing our knowledge and technical expertise to provide the right light, in the right place and controlled with the right systems.

We aim to deliver the best quality and service, on time, every time, for our customers. And for your customers, we try our utmost to provide lighting that will enrich the environments where they work and live.

Terry Dean | Managing Director


Light Solutions 54 Light Solutions

Products at a Glance

Cradle98 – 99

Crieff102 – 103

Corvus104 – 105

Sorento74 – 77

Akord Bullet86 – 87

Barosa78 – 79

Forza88 – 89

Rio80 – 81

Manhattan82 – 83

Toronto84 – 85

Vaio LED160 – 165

Petra176 – 177

Anello LED166 – 167

Capra-Mini178 – 181

Light Point168 – 171

Capra178 – 183

Portea LED172 – 173

Capra-Compact178 – 185

Renza LED174 – 175

Cassia LED186 – 187

Akord Cone86 – 87

Milano44 – 51

Monaro LED II52 – 55

Monaro52 – 57

Evora LED58 – 63

Evora58 – 65

Camaro66 – 73

Stratum92 – 93

Excel94 – 95

Dover96 – 97

Polar98 – 99

Windsor110 – 111

Lancaster112 – 113

Knightsbridge114 – 115

Westminster116 – 117

Pall Mall116 – 117

Portland118 – 119

Berkeley118 – 119

Strand120 – 123

Ely124 – 127

Iffley130 – 131

Hatfield132 – 133

York134 – 135

Warwick134 – 135

Salisbury136 – 137

Newport136 – 137

Braemar138 – 139

Waterford138 – 139

Henley140 – 141

Garda218 – 219

Tatra210 – 211

Aventis212 – 213

Reno198 – 199

Pharola-Wall200 – 201

Kona202 – 203

Vertica LED204 – 205

Vertica206 – 207

Lyra188 – 189

Mano LED190 – 191

Monza192 – 193

Malo LED194 – 195

Luca196 – 197

Brackets279 – 283

Pedestals278

Feeder Pillars288 – 289

Columns260 – 265

Contemporary Architectural

Traditional

Classic

Road Lantern144 – 145

DW400146 – 147

Meridian148 – 149

Toro150 – 151

Functional

Lighting Powered by Nature154 – 155

Solar & Wind Illuminated LED Handrail Columns, Brackets, Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

Lago226 – 227

Pharola228 – 229

Pharola-Max230 – 231

Trebem224 – 225

Rona238 – 239

Nexus & Riga240 – 241

Polar & Vector242 – 243

Silka-Max236 – 237

Silka232 – 235

Cannon & Eton244 – 245

Bollards

Colada248 – 249

Tizona250 – 251

Sabre252 – 253

Colada LED248 – 249

Floodlighting

Projection

Projection

Light Solutions 7

NEW Products NEW Products


6 Light Solutions

Forz

aPa

ges

88 –

89

Rona

Page

s 23

8 –

239

Sola

r W

ind

Page

s 15

2 –

157

Spec

ial c

olum

nsPa

ges

266

– 26

9

Evora LEDPages 62 – 63

CamaroPages 66 – 73

LED

Lig

ht E

ngin

ePa

ges

32 –

33

& 1

08 –

109

Light Solutions 9

NEW ProductsNEW Products


8 Light Solutions

Phar

ola-

Max

Page

s 23

0 –

231

Treb

emPa

ges

224

– 22

5

Cass

ia L

EDPa

ges

186

– 18

7

Capra-Compact

Capr

aPa

ges

178

– 18

5

Capra-Mini

Mal

o LE

DPa

ges

194

– 19

5

Mano LED – Square

Man

o LE

DPa

ges

190

– 19

1

Mano LED – Circular

Toro

Page

s 15

0 –

151


Light Solutions 11

ISO Standards held:ISO is the International Organisation for Standardisation. DW Windsor were one of the first within the lighting industry to receive all three accreditations, giving customers, suppliers and employees a benchmark assurance that our operational standards and business processes are among the best in the industry.

ISO 9001

The International Standard for Quality Management Systems (QMS).

ISO 9001:2008 ensures a systematic and consistent approach to the management of our business activities. DW Windsor is recognised, both within the UK and overseas, as a provider of quality, exterior lighting solutions. Our reputation is built on a commitment to quality, dedication to customer satisfaction, continuous improvement of both product and processes, outstanding levels of product performance and an innovative approach to research and development.

ISO 14001

The International Standard for Environmental Management Systems.

There are three fundamental requirements to achieve ISO 14401: prevention of pollution, compliance with legislation and continual improvement through an EMS (Energy Management System).

As a UK manufacturer who continually strives to exceed our customers’ exacting carbon reduction commitments, the ISO 14001 accreditation for our Environmental Management System (EMS) is a particularly important milestone. Reducing our environmental impact is an on-going process. Our dedicated team continually look towards our next set of performance improvements including the yearly reduction of our landfill waste by 10 tonnes.

Lumicom

As an environmentally aware manufacturer we subscribe to the Lumicom system to manage the collection and responsible disposal of end of life lighting equipment (see page 312).

OHSAS 18001

The International Occupational Health and Safety Management Standard. Addressing health and safety (rather than product safety).

ROSPA

DW Windsor was privileged to receive The Royal Society for the Prevention of Accidents Gold Award for Occupational Health and Safety in May 2012.

The extremely prestigious Gold award, is awarded to those organisations that demonstrate the most robust of health and safety management systems, leadership and workforce involvement.

In Recognition of our Commitment

Essex Street Steps, London

DW Windsor products and services are accredited and audited to the highest possible industry standards, ensuring that we always deliver on our company ethos of Style with Performance.

For over 35 years, DW Windsor has worked in parallel with the market, developing our products and services in line with changing expectations, raising standards and bringing our considerable experience and industry knowledge to bear. Known throughout the industry for the quality of our products and the high standards of service and support we offer our customers, we are also recognised for our ambitious new product development improvement programme.

We have a reputation, particularly in public sector lighting, for outstanding quality and performance through innovation, attention to detail and customer focus. We offer a wide range of additional services to our customers including: special product design and manufacture, lighting scheme design and visualisation, project management, laboratory testing and refurbishment and replica.

Pro-active in approach, our business is built on developing long term, trusting relationships. Working alongside our clients we help manage your project from start to finish, providing expert support and advice at all stages.

Our many successes include:• Queen’s Award for Outstanding Export Achievement• Queen’s Award for Environmental Achievement• Royal Warrant

Sophisticated solutions to meet stringent regulations

LUX 2011 Award for Urban Lighting using Garda LED Handrail


Light Solutions 13

How We Can Support You

We offer a comprehensive, complimentary lighting design service to clients. Whether you require a detailed design from scratch, a quick calculation to check your own design, or even just an initial discussion of concepts, we have the capabilities to help you.

Our experienced team is equipped to visit you at any time, before, during or after the design process to assist with establishing design parameters, requirements and time frames for your project. Our aim is to provide thorough, timely and professionally presented lighting design schemes to meet your targets and exceed your expectations.

Our in-house team of lighting designers use the latest software to undertake lighting designs including road, car park, area, sports, railway, architectural and accent lighting. This careful selection of software allows us to produce designs using customers’ drawings and to create visualisations including night-time 3D environments with accurate photometric data. The realism which can be achieved is impressive; so much so that it can often be difficult to distinguish reality from simulation.

Comprehensive scheme designs are produced in either hard copy or digital format. These can include a layout plot with results, a comprehensive report document, scheme visualisations, product information, general drawings and quotations. The aim is for the scheme design to include all information that may be required including an explanation of the requirements we have designed to, details of lamp specifications, luminaires and all other aspects relating to the project. We take pride in our openness and clarity regarding technical aspects of the design, with the emphasis on providing a high quality, high efficiency solution.

Sharing the Knowledge

Our CPD seminars provide valuable insight and debate on key issues that continue to present challenges and opportunities to all of us involved in the lighting industry.

We invest heavily in researching the areas that really matter and over the years we have built a significant knowledge base. The result of which is a range of seminars that aim to fulfil the ever changing needs of today’s lighting specifiers.

Check our website for an up-to-date list of available topics: dwwindsor.co.uk To request a seminar, email [email protected] or discuss with your Project Engineer.

If you have a question about our products please contact our dedicated email address: [email protected], for an answer within twenty-four hours (Monday to Friday)

Night-time 3D environment created using photometric data St. Giles Hospital, Camberwell

12 Light Solutions



Our products are the most important thing we have to say about ourselves – which is why we have an established new product development programme. With a strong track record in the development of high quality exterior lighting, we strive to anticipate future trends and provide solutions that exceed expectation and provide real value to our customers.

Providing the Highest Performing

Products

Photometric Calculations Available Via DIALux

With a typical lifespan of 25 years, exterior luminaires are required to cope with a significant amount of punishment from the forces of nature. Throughout that time they must maintain their design integrity while consistently delivering on performance.

With over 394,000 users worldwide and available in 26 languages, DIALux has fast become the industry standard lighting design software. DW Windsor is therefore working in partnership with DIALux to offer photometric data for our products via this design software package.

By providing data in this way we hope to assist you to make an informed product and performance choice, helping you to specify the right product for your project requirements.

DIALux is suitable for interior or exterior calculations and visualisations. It provides readily available and up to date product photometry, with its “instant” update facility. Professional detailed lighting reports and visualisations can be created.

It is free to use and can be downloaded from our website at: dwwindsor.com/dialux

Visualisations created using DIALux software Visualisations created using DiaLUX software

For more detailed information or assistance in using DIALux contact our Applications Department on 01992 474600

Integrating Sphere


Light Solutions 17

Integrating Sphere

As part of our on-going commitment to providing high performing luminaires and in light of the significant evolution in LED technology, DW Windsor has invested in an integrating sphere for our well-equipped laboratory.

With a diameter of three metres it will accommodate even the largest of our LED luminaires. A large sphere is necessary to measure large luminaires because the internal surface area of the sphere needs to be over fifty times the external surface area of the luminaire being measured. Without this relationship, the accuracy of the measurements may be questionable.

Custom designed to our specification, we believe the sphere, which is calibrated with three ultimate reference lamps to traceable standards, thus more accurate than a traditional photometer, is one of the biggest and possibly the most accurate sphere in the country.

We believe, therefore, that the Integrating Sphere is vital to our on-going ability to continue to design and develop high performance LED luminaires.

What is an Integrating Sphere?

Measuring lumen output, an Integrating Sphere, also known as an Ulbricht sphere, is an optical tool consisting of a hollow spherical cavity which is both diffuse and highly reflective.

Use of a spectroradiometer allows measurement of the colour spectrum including, colour temperature and colour rendering, allowing us to issue accurate data, in line with industry best practise and legislation.

The Integrating Sphere, which encapsulates all light, has an optical sensor located in a satellite sphere to accurately measure only the reflected light.

Why do we need one?

The spectral output of LEDs is significantly different to that of a traditional discharge light source, with many variables to take into consideration, including BIN, tolerance, colour temperature, junction temperature and secondary losses through optical systems such as lens and glazing. Additionally and very importantly, the drive current, thermal management and other factors relating to the luminaire in which the LEDs are mounted have a significant effect on total luminous flux so trying to extrapolate LED manufacturers technical data is impossible.

The only truly accurate method is to measure the light output using an Integrating Sphere and spectroradiometer, allowing us to produce data in accordance with LM79. We can measure photopic lumens, scotopic lumens as well as scotopic-photopic (SP) ratios, an important metric and one that is referenced in the forthcoming update to BS 5489.

On the 1 September 2010, EU legislation came into force requiring light output to be labelled in terms of lumens (the measure of visible light), instead of electrical Watts (the measure of electrical power supplied), to enable the fair comparison of lighting technologies.

With potentially misleading information on the market we believe that the accuracy of the data we are now able to supply will prevent disillusionment with LEDs as a light source and give specifiers the confidence to design schemes with deliverable performance.

A Sure Test of Quality

We continually strive for innovation as a means to positively affect the performance characteristics of our designs. Accurate measurement and reliable testing are the foundation of our product development activities.

As part of our on-going commitment to have one of the UK’s most comprehensive lighting laboratories, we have made the significant investment of a market-leading Integrating Sphere.

Water ingress testing

Impact test on glazing

Test facilities:

Integrating sphere Measures lumen output. Use of a spectral radiometer allows measurement of colour temperature and colour rendering outputs – information required by our customers, allowing us to issue accurate data in line with industry best practise and legislation.

Goniophotometer Measures the distribution of light and efficacy of a luminaire as a graphic format expressed as a polar diagram of luminous intensity. This is the basis for photometric data production and calculations.

Ingress protection Measures ingress resistance levels to solids and liquids.

Thermal compliance Tests thermal performance of proprietary components and the entire product within its envisaged environment.

Radio suppression Tests compliance with radio frequency interference suppression to the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) regulations.

Electrical protection Tests electrical safety, wiring and insulation compliance, electrical strength and earth continuity.

Impact protection Tests resistance to external mechanical forces, in accordance with the IK Code.

Vibration protection Tests resistance to external wind and vibration forces.

Life endurance Determines long-term continuity of performance and compliance to standards. All our products are designed, manufactured and tested under a Quality Assurance system, registration number 53278, for BS EN ISO 9001:2000.

16 Light Solutions


Light Solutions 19

Why use white light in outdoor lighting?

Accident prevention White light makes the streets safer for drivers and pedestrians. Improved visibility means much better road safety. Tests show that drivers are able to detect roadside movement faster and from a greater distance with white light. Crucially, this gives them more time to stop if a child, adult or animal is about to cross their path.

Sense of safety and crime reduction White light plays a crucial role in helping people feel safer when they are outdoors at night. Superior colour rendering and a high level of perceived brightness make it easier to distinguish objects, colours, shapes and people. In particular, it makes facial recognition easier, even from a distance, and this really helps to reduce anxiety levels. Research has shown that white light promotes a virtuous cycle – when people feel safer, they stay in the streets later and in larger numbers.

Beautification White light plays a major role within architectural lighting schemes to create striking effects in order to highlight important features. The use of different variations of colour temperature within the white light range ensures that a contrast exists between area and feature lighting.

Mesopic vision

In recent years, many studies have taken place to try and understand how the eye perceives white light compared to the yellow light of high pressure sodium (SON) light sources. The use of white light for street lighting has increased as the efficacies and colour properties have improved, ensuring it provides comparable light output to a traditional high pressure sodium scheme for a similar amount of energy consumption.

Scotopic vision is the term used for low light level vision, where the eye utilises only the rod receptors for sight, picking out movement but no discernible colours or definition. Photopic vision is the opposite of this, whereby well-lit conditions encourage the cone receptors, responsible for colour and definition, to be used for sight.

When artificial street lighting is used, we create lighting levels which lie somewhere between Photopic and Scotopic vision, known as Mesopic vision. During this state, both photopic and scotopic vision is required to be able to see.

Research has found that the quality of white light alters our perception of brightness, allowing lower lighting levels with white light to create the same eye response to those requiring higher lighting levels using a yellow light source.

Scotopic/Photopic Ratios In order to understand the level to which a white light source can be dimmed relative to a SON source and be perceived by the human eye to give the same level of brightness, the ratio of scotopic to photopic lumens (S/P ratio) must be understood. The higher the ratio, the better the light is at stimulating the eye and therefore we can use light sources with high

S/P ratios at lower wattages (or dimmed) to provide the same perceived light level as high wattage, low S/P ratio sources. In general, white light sources have high S/P ratios and with yellow/orange sources these ratios are low.

This reduction in light output when using white light sources has been recognised by the British lighting standards. The level of illumination required on subsidiary roads and paths may be reduced by as much as 30% if the light source has a colour rendering index of 60Ra or higher.

Future lighting standards will utilise these reductions in light levels if white light sources are adopted more widely than at present. This will ensure that enough lighting is being provided to correctly illuminate the required area whilst being able to reduce the installed wattage of a product by opting for a white light source.

By utilising the accuracy of our integrating sphere, we are able to measure both the photopic and scotopic lumens created by a light source. The ratio between the two, expressed as a single number, is required to calculate the reduction in lighting level which can be employed to create a similar lit scene to that of a high pressure sodium scheme lit to a higher lighting level.

White Light

Monaro Victoria Way, Ashford

When there is insufficient or no daylight, we have to rely on alternatives to illuminate our world. As far back as 1417, lanterns with candles were used on the streets of London on winter nights. The subsequent invention of gas, oil and finally electric street lighting helped bring urban areas out of the dark ages. Today, billions of people take street lighting for granted.High pressure sodium lamps have been the first

choice in street lighting for a number of years, mainly because they produce high levels of light for a given amount of energy and have a long, reliable lifespan. However, their distinctive yellow/orange light makes it difficult to distinguish colours. Today outdoor lighting no longer has to rely on yellow high pressure sodium light.

Alternative light sources, such as LED and metal halide lamps combine high-quality white light with a very high efficacy, superior to that of high pressure sodium. For further information on these technologies and the energy savings that can be achieved with LED see pages 32 – 33, CosmoPolis lamps see pages 20 – 21 and StreetWise lamps see pages 22 – 23.

Changing the world with energy efficient white light

Sorento, Westfield, Stratford City


Light Solutions 21

Investment cost The total investment cost depends mainly on the choice of luminaire, lamp system and whether it offers dimming. Although, in many cases the advanced optics, in combination with the CosmoPolis system, will result in wider spacing requirements and therefore fewer luminaires to light the street, making extra investment in new columns a consideration.

Energy cost The energy cost depends mainly on the choice of lamp system. CosmoPolis has the highest efficiency (20% better than high-pressure sodium) and can be combined with electronic dimming solutions to generate additional savings of up to 40%. The use of white light can bring lower lighting levels and therefore even greater energy savings. If energy costs rise, reducing energy use becomes even more critical.

Maintenance cost Thanks to the high reliability and long lifetime performance of the CosmoPolis Xtra system, maintenance cycles can be extended. While the initial service lifetime (90% survivals) of 4 years already set the industry benchmark, continued innovation now delivers reliable performance for up to 6 years (24,000 burning hours).

CosmoPolis System Warranty The long lifetime and reliability of the CosmoPolis system is underpinned with testing evidence. For that reason Philips gives an 8 year warranty on the Xtreme gear and a 3 year warranty on the lamp when operated on a Philips ballast.

CosmoPolis system is the key to unlocking energy savings

The high efficiency of CosmoPolis is driven even higher with the use of electronic dimming gear. By dimming street lighting at appropriate times, CosmoPolis instantly uses even less energy, reduces costs and light pollution. The DynaVision Xtreme range can dim the CosmoPolis lamp down to 50% light output without a negative effect on lamp performance. There are now several control options available for CosmoPolis systems, from easy, integrated stand-alone dimming like LumiStep to full CMS compatibility using a DALI interface. These options allow for a very efficient and cost effective solution for every installation.

Xtreme driver The full range of PrimaVision and DynaVision products is now designed with Xtreme technology, delivering long life and reliable operation. The product is designed to perform under typical outdoor conditions with moisture, dust, vibrations and shocks and reach at least a 20 years lifetime with exceptionally low failure rates. Xtreme technology also protects against electrical surges on the mains and will not extinguish the light, fail or allow these surges to reduce system lifetime. It even protects the gear from lightning strikes of up to 5kA/10kV.

For detailed lamp information see pages 314 – 315

CosmoPolis lamps are now available as standard across a large range of DW Windsor luminairesSee individual Product Codes for availability

Evora Tabard Sreet, London

In the past, one of the main reasons for using high-pressure sodium lamps was energy efficiency. However, thanks to ongoing innovation, white light has made a breakthrough in energy efficiency with the Philips CosmoPolis system that can reach up to 120 lm/W.

A public lighting project will typically have a life-cycle of 25 to 30 years. The total cost of ownership over this period consists of the initial investment and ongoing maintenance and energy costs. The energy cost accounts for the largest portion of the total, and therefore offers the greatest potential for savings. A small additional investment can have a huge impact on the energy consumption over the entire life of an installation. This means a return on investment (ROI) for the additional expenditure is positive in 3 – 5 years, depending on energy prices.

This means that you can save energy by using CosmoPolis instead of high-pressure sodium lamps in new lighting installations. If you use advanced drivers with integrated controls, additional savings of up to 40% can be made through dimming.

In addition, CosmoPolis lamps are extremely low in mercury content compared with high pressure sodium lamps.

www.philips.com/cosmopolis

20 Light Solutions

CosmoPolisEnergy Savings Solution


Light Solutions 23

CMH technology complies with all the current and pending EU requirements for lamps, and can therefore be specified with the confidence that the technology will not be out of date in a few years’ time.

GE Lighting’s CMH StreetWise™ ceramic metal halide produces lumen output per system Watt greater than competitive technologies, enabling end users to cut energy bills. Users can simply replace existing luminaires with lower-wattage CMH StreetWise™ lamped products on a one-for-one basis or fit the same wattage CMH StreetWise™ and reduce the number of luminaires required. Either way, as well as reduced energy costs, they also benefit from the high reliability and lower re-lamping cycles of CMH technology.

Dimming for further energy saving

CMH StreetWise™ lamps can be dimmed with relatively little effect on their colour performance, offering the potential for further energy savings.

The colour performance of lamps in the StreetWise™ range is such that, when dimmed, they provide similar colour properties. Colour rendering is 70Ra at full power and 65Ra at 65% power; Colour temperature increases by 400K when dimmed to 65% power.

This ensures that if used throughout a scheme, there will be no noticeable different in colour during dimmed periods.

Ultimate performance

GE ConstantColor™ CMH StreetWise™ lamps are fitted with standard E27/E40 bases used for high pressure sodium lamp types, allowing direct replacement in existing luminaires. The lamps support both electronic and magnetic gear types and can be dimmed, outperforming most standard HID systems.

With the high reliability and sustained lumen output across a longer working life of 24,000 hours, this relates to around 6 years of regular usage within a street lighting scheme. This helps to reduce maintenance cycles and the costs associated with regular lamp changes, providing further savings.

Features:

• Excellent white light with efficiency up to 111 lm/W

• Lumen maintenance, 80% at 12,000 hours

• Wide range: 50W/70W/100W/150W

• Direct retrofits with High Pressure Sodium lamp types

• Dimmable (with the exception of 50W on electromagnetic ballast)

• System flexibility, operating on both electronic and magnetic gear

For detailed lamp information see pages 314 – 315

StreetWise lamps are now available as standard across a large range of DW Windsor luminairesSee individual Product Codes for availability

Until now, public authorities and other organisations have had to choose between high cost, high quality outdoor illumination or low cost alternatives which, even at peak efficiency, make streets and other areas look less inviting.

The European Union continues to apply pressure to eliminate outdated, inefficient lighting. Under ErP Regulations, manufacturers will be required to phase-out a number of popular lamp types between 2012 and 2017. The reason for these changes is clear as lighting now accounts for more than 20 per cent of energy consumption around the world.

Ceramic Metal Halide (CMH) outdoor lighting offers the best of both worlds, offering bright, white light and low running and maintenance costs. With CMH lighting, streets and other public spaces can feel safer for pedestrians. Furthermore, the good colour rendering of these lamps improves the ability of drivers to recognise shapes and colours, especially in peripheral vision. It promotes quicker driver response times, too.

CMH lighting delivers competitive levels and higher quality of light compared with high pressure sodium (HPS) with similar energy consumption; it combines the efficiency of HPS with the whiteness of metal halide.

As well as good colour rendering and reduced running costs, the combination of CMH technology with suitable electronic gear ensures excellent and sustained rates of durability, while the compact nature of the light sources enables designers to ensure consistent light distribution in any application.

Scene lit with high pressure sodium lighting

Scene lit with StreetWise ceramic metal halide

www.gelighting.com/eu

StreetWise™

CMH Technology


Light Solutions 25

Option ‘PS’ – Part Night Switch

One option is to switch off exterior lighting altogether for the part of night when traffic levels are much lower and areas are not in use – typically the early hours of the morning.

Using photocell controls similar to that in the Part Night Dim setup, lighting can be controlled to switch off between certain periods rather than be dimmed.

Using this type of arrangement, users can expect somewhere in the region of a 50% reduction in energy costs as well as the associated carbon reduction.

The standard DW Windsor option covers complete switch off between Midnight and 6am via a part-night photocell. Other times and solutions can be offered also, contact us at [email protected] for further details.

To choose this option for specific products, please choose Option ‘PS’ under photocell control within the Product Code table.

Option ‘PD’ – Part Night Dim

Utilising intelligent photocells and control gear we can supply a predefined dimming schedule designed to reduce energy consumption and lighting levels.

By implementing a dimming regime to an exterior lighting scheme, it is possible to save around 40% on energy bills without having to completely switch off the lighting. This ensures that a level of light is still present for security and access reasons without impacting on the environment.

The standard DW Windsor option covers dimming down to 25% (dependant on light source) between Midnight and 6am. Other times and dimming levels can be offered in addition to this, contact us at [email protected] for further details.

To choose this option for specific products, please choose Option ‘PD’ under photocell control within the Product Code table.

Option ‘C’ – Full CMS Interface

Using a Central Management System (CMS) such as Harvard LeafNut, Mayflower, Telensa or Zodion, users can control a number of exterior lighting components through a central web based system.

This allows dimming and switching regimes to be designed and implemented as users see fit. The majority of these systems also report back on details such as energy consumption, operating conditions and life expectancy.

Speak to one of our Project Engineers to find out more information about the current CMS software we are able to integrate with.

To choose this option for specific products, please choose one of the following options under photocell control within the Product Code table.

Option ‘CH’ – Harvard LeafNut (see pages 26-27) Options ‘CM’ – Mayflower CLC Options ‘CT’ – Telensa PLANet Options ‘CZ’ – Zodion Vizion

For more product specific information on the Harvard LeafNut CMS system, please see pages 26 – 27

Control & Dim

Monaro Victoria Way, Ashford

With the ever increasing global demand for energy and the decreasing availability of natural resources, it is now imperative for all of us to consider carefully energy use. In recent times many local authorities and private sector businesses have had to consider the possibility of implementing a routine to either dim or switch off street lighting in order to reduce energy costs and the associated carbon usage.

The Carbon Reduction Commitment (CRC) is now in place to ensure users of energy are also taking active steps to reduce their carbon consumption. This places further importance on taking extra steps to reduce electricity consumption.

We want to support our customers who are facing these difficult choices by offering a range of options to cover the potential solutions available. This means that the majority of our products now have the ability to be manufactured with pre-set dimming or switching schedules as standard, giving you the control you need.

Giving you the control you need


Light Solutions 27

There has recently been much discussion about how to deal with the subject of street lighting energy consumption, which is widely regarded as a major contributor to carbon emissions.

Switching lights off completely during off-peak periods to save energy and reduce pollution has been discussed and tested, resulting in public outcry that complete blackouts may have a major impact on crime levels and road safety.

As an alternative to complete switch off, many local authorities in the UK and across the world are looking at technologically advanced systems to help reduce street lighting levels, carbon emissions and make energy savings. Harvard’s LeafNut system is leading the way in this field.

BranchNode

LeafNode

LeafNut is a complete turn-key solution for street lighting equipment, from ballast to the secure user interface; it allows street lighting systems to integrate seamlessly with each other.

This gives local authorities the ability to effectively and efficiently manage public street lighting by dimming lights as and when required, instead of having to resort to turning them off. Using the Internet, modern electronics and innovative wireless technology, LeafNut is already being used by around 100 local authorities worldwide.

LeafNut is deployed as part of a complete street lighting solution that also includes the WiMAC wireless Central Management System (CMS) protocol. This system, which has been tested in many field trials across the UK, ensures it is robust and ready to be widely implemented, allowing street lighting operators to remotely adjust the light output of each individual street light.

Supplied with an auto commissioning PDA tool, the LeafNut system is easy to install and configure. As soon as each LeafNode is connected, the GPS locates the exact position, specific serial number and the ballast type which is then automatically stored into the LeafNut system as well as asset management databases used by the local authority.

With the system, street lighting equipment can be controlled wirelessly and real time linked, through the use of a webserver and GPS, directly to the microprocessor in the electronic ballast. Street lights can be programmed with different switching or dimming regimes, corresponding to peak requirements such as rush hours and areas of late night entertainment or periods of reduced usage such as the early hours of the morning.

By gathering information from each luminaire’s ballast, LeafNut can accurately monitor all lighting units under its control. It provides on-screen diagnostics including operational efficiency, predicted lamp failure, ballast condition, fault finding and energy consumption.

LeafNut has a mapping feature which utilises Google Maps to identify individual lamps showing their location, history and status, allowing fault reports with work orders to be automatically raised and emailed to maintenance crews.

An Android App allows mobile monitoring of entire systems to deliver detailed summaries of performance statistics. This is especially useful in more remote areas where the system benefits isolated villages, eliminating the cost and carbon footprint of roving maintenance vehicles touring outlying districts on the lookout for failed lamps.

UK street lighting is entirely unmetered and has traditionally been charged via inventory records and a photocell array, required to measure the switching times of all street lights within a location and hence calculates the cost of electricity. Before the introduction of CMS systems, no allowance or mechanism for variable lighting control has been possible.

LeafNut’s CMS was the first solution in the UK to directly measure actual consumption, allowing local and highway authorities to obtain the full financial benefits that can be realised from dimming street lighting levels.

LeafNut technology is now available as standard across a large range of DW Windsor luminairesSee individual Product Codes for availability

www.harvardeng.com

LeafNode control integrated into Rio

LeafNode control integrated into Windsor

26 Light Solutions

LeafNutFor Ultimate Lighting Control



It is designed to create widely different light distribution patterns from a single luminaire style – and the optic can even be adjusted on-site during the life of the scheme to meet changing user requirements.

What is Diamond Optic®?The patented Diamond Optic® system comprises four multi-facetted reflector elements, arranged in the shape of a diamond – hence its name. These reflectors can be independently adjusted to create a wide range of composite light distributions. Each reflector produces a controlled beam that can put light precisely where it is needed – and the four beams combine to make possible a wide range of light patterns, appropriate to most types of area lighting installation.

Diamond Optic® – a versatile lighting design tool

Diamond Optic® gives engineers and designers the freedom to tailor the lighting to the physical shape of the space being lit. For example, the same luminaire can be set up to offer a rectangular distribution for road lighting, a wider rectangular pattern for wide roads and pedestrian precincts – or a square formation for car parks. In a roadside situation, ‘back lighting’ to the adjacent pavements can be created to facilitate pedestrian safety.

Tailoring the light pattern to the specific area being lit also gives the planner freedom to place lighting columns where they look best, rather than being forced into layouts determined by inflexible light distributions. Equally importantly, the use of the Diamond Optic® enables column spacings to be increased, reducing the total number of lighting units required.

If you wish to find out more about this uniquely powerful optic, please contact our Applications Department on 01992 474600

A 5/35 B 10/10 C 31/35 D 5/25

Key Features• Allows for increased column spacings

giving lower capital, maintenance and running costs

• Compatible with Philips CosmoPolis and GE Streetwise, as well as the full range of existing lamp types

• An adjustable reflector profile to refine the light distribution

Our unique and revolutionary Diamond Optic® reflector system has been favoured by local authorities and private sector specifiers through out the UK since 1990, primarily because of its combination of high performance, exceptional versatility and control of light pollution.

Milano The Hub, Milton Keynes

Diamond Optic®

The ultimate in flexible, precise lighting control


Setting A (5/35)

Typical Applications: Wide roads Car parks (from perimeter)

The 5º reflectors light the near side pavement, the 35º reflectors light wide distances across from the luminaire.

5º

35º

Setting B (10/10)

Typical Applications: Footpaths Cycle paths

Reflector pairs are pulled in to 10º to create a near symmetrical lozenge-shaped isolux template.

10º

10º

Setting C (31/35)

Typical Applications: Open areas Car parks (from perimeter)

This setting splits the distribution equally around the column and can dispense with the need for two luminaires on each column.

31º

35º

Setting D (5/25)

Typical Applications: Standard roads Wide pathways

The 5° reflectors light the near side pavement, the 25° reflectors light a ‘standard’ road-width across from the luminaire.

5º

25º

Diamond Optic®

A highly flexible reflector system

The example illustrates the full flexibility, functionality and maximum efficiency that can be achieved with Diamond Optic®.

One luminaire type can be used throughout a multi-area scheme, with different Diamond Optic® settings, to create the optimal lighting performance for each area.




LED Light Engine

Known for developing high performance solutions, such as our popular Diamond Optic®, we have introduced an easy and cost effective way to upgrade existing lighting schemes to LED, across our range of Contemporary to Traditional street lights.

What is our LED Light Engine?

Our commitment to include an LED version of all our product ranges has been the driving force behind introducing a self-contained LED light source, called LED Light Engine. This is available as a replacement, retrofit light source for DW Windsor schemes installed less than 10 years ago, across a number of ranges. In addition, we are now able to create new LED versions of a wide range of our luminaires.

Retrofit LED Designed for simple on-site retrofit into DW Windsor products, installed within the last 10 years, the LED Light Engine can be fitted directly into an existing lantern. In the same time as it takes to replace a lamp all the benefits of LED can be incorporated into a previously lamped scheme, without the cost of new luminaires.

Performance Equivalent to Diamond Optic® The optical performance of LED Light Engine has been designed to match that of our popular Diamond Optic, offering a choice of four different lighting distributions. The similarities are particularly useful when considering retrofitting LED as a light source into existing lanterns or schemes, where LED technology can be provided with relatively little effect on the lit environment. This is particularly interesting when considering reducing energy usage and lowering maintenance costs in an existing lamped scheme.

Performance Compared with Lamped Versions The DW Windsor LED Light Engine is available in three different sizes. The specific information on which LED Light Engine is available for each luminaire option can be found within the product code tables on each product page.

Comparisons to light output of other light sources are below:

Number of LEDs Total Wattage Comparison Light Source

12 29W 45W CosmoPolis / 50W SON-T



Compatible Control Options The following control options are available for luminaires using LED Light Engine as retrofit or new.• Switch: on/off through conventional photocell

(or part-night switch off)• Dim: factory set/customer specific regime

• Dali: full CMS/remote monitoring functionality: suitable for use with Harvard LeafNut, Telensa and Mayflower

Light Source Information We use high performing Cree LEDs for this offering.

Colour Temperature / Colour Rendering (CRI): • 3000K (warm white) / 80Ra or• 4500K (neutral white) / 70Ra

Light Engine Efficacy: 73 lm/W

Luminaires available with LED Light Engine

Retrofit & New • DW400 pages 146 – 147• Stratum pages 92 – 93• Dover pages 96 – 97• Windsor pages 110 – 111• Strand Family pages 120 – 123• Ely pages 124 – 125• Iffley pages 130 – 131

New • Milano pages 48 – 51• Evora LED pages 62 – 63• Lancaster pages 112 – 113• Knightsbridge pages 114 – 115• Pall Mall/Westminster pages 116 – 117• Hatfield pages 132 – 133• York/Warwick pages 134 – 135• Newport/Salisbury pages 136 – 137• Waterford/Braemar pages 138 – 139• Henley pages 140 – 141• Tizona pages 250 – 251

Key Features• Available as a retrofit LED solution for

existing DW Windsor schemes or provides LED options for new luminaires

• Significant energy savings and reduced maintenance costs across all products

• Simple on-site installation for retrofit

• Equivalent distribution to Diamond Optic® A, B, C & D

• Energy saving dimming, switching and full CMS options

Please contact [email protected] for achievable savings or for assistance in planning an effective roll-out of upgrading to LED with our Light Engine

Array A Array B

Array C Array D

Light Solutions 35

In order to increase this offering further, we have developed a new Luminance Optic, the LX1, to increase the DWW product range for main road lighting schemes. As with the Diamond Optic®, the LX1 can be specified in many of our products, from Contemporary and functional to Classic and Traditional ranges to provide the highest performance lighting solution in the style of luminaire needed to suit the environment.

Main road lighting schemes requires stringent lighting design parameters to be met, which often requires a different type of optic to be used. These are usually a single-piece pressed optic, which completely surrounds the lamp, with various facets to create the desired shape of light required on the ground.

In order to ensure we provide the best possible solution to complement our product range, we are using the most up-to-date, highly reflective material from which to manufacture the optic. This gives us excellent light output and reduced losses, whilst also creating the shape of light required to meet the lighting levels for main road lighting (see pages 310 – 311).

Products with LX Luminance Optic options:

• Evora pages 64 – 65

• Rio pages 80 – 81

• All Optima luminaires pages 92 – 99

• Akord Cone A & B pages 86 – 87

• Strand A & A+ pages 120 – 121

• Ely A pages 124 – 125

Adjustability

In order to provide the greatest choice of options for light distribution, the LX1 Luminance Optic has numerous lamp settings available by simply adjusting the forward or backward position of the lamp holder. This can either be factory pre-set or adjusted on-site to ensure flexibility through design and installation.

Specification

The precision engineered LX1 Luminance Optic can be specified within a range of our products simply through choosing this option within the product code table.

LX1 Luminance Optic

New LX1 Luminance Optic for main road lighting available in a range of products

DW Windsor is well known for its high performance, versatile and award-winning Diamond Optic® reflector system which provides a wide number of lighting distributions to suit both typical and unusual lighting scheme needs.

If you wish to find out more about this road optic, please contact our Applications Department on 01992 474600

Key Features• Designed specifically for roadway lighting solutions

• Optimised to achieve the stringent ME class lighting levels for main roads utilising CosmoPolis, High Pressure Sodium and Metal Halide light sources

• Available in a wide range of DW Windsor products in Contemporary, Classic, Traditional and Functional product ranges



Light Solutions 37

Sometimes we start from an architects’ drawing, sometimes from a tight technical specification. Just as importantly, there are times when our brief is nothing more than a half-formed notion in our customer’s imagination; whatever the initial input, the outcome is always as brilliant as its inspiration.

Our bespoke solutions can be found all over the UK: Cleveleys Promenade, Edge Lane – Liverpool, the O2 Arena – London to name just a few and overseas in Singapore, Bahrain, Cyprus, Portugal and Dubai.

No matter what the brief, our team are ready and waiting to respond to the challenge.

Unique Solutions

LED staircase Royal Terrace Gardens, Torquay

Brilliance Project, Blackpool Brilliance Project, Blackpool Bankside, London 02 Arena, Greenwich

If you need stylish, reliable and robust product solutions, any of our standard range of products will meet your requirements.

If on the other hand you require a bespoke or unique solution our designers can help you to deliver your vision.

If you have your own unique product design requirement, contact your Project Engineer or Customer Services: e: [email protected] t: 01992 474600

36 Light Solutions


Light Solutions 39

Refurbishments & Replicas

Albert Embankment, London London Eye Tower Bridge, London Battersea Bridge, London

By appointment to Her Majesty The Queen Manufacturer of Replicas and Refurbs DW Windsor Lighting Hertfordshire

Battersea Bridge, London

Maintaining the overall look and feel of ‘Heritage’ lighting can be seen as both an art and a science; the lantern, column and embellishments have to remain authentic, yet comply with all the current lighting standards. DW Windsor has perfected this balance over a number of years to become one of the strongest in the industry.

Effective, respectful restoration involves all the traditional craftsmanship and skill that went into the product’s original creation. But making a vintage luminaire meet modern performance and quality standards calls for a whole new set of talents: the design ingenuity and technical expertise to build the latest optics and electrical components into housings originally designed for a very different, less demanding age.

There are plenty of companies capable of ‘tidying up’ worn and weathered columns and lanterns. We prefer a hands-on approach with real involvement which can mean deconstructing each piece of equipment, rebuilding, re-engineering and sensitively recreating a product as good as new or better.

Having often worked with English Heritage, we take the responsibility of preserving important parts of the nation’s architectural legacy very seriously, ensuring every detail is as historically authentic as it is technically excellent.

For further information contact Customer Services: e: [email protected] t: 01992 474600

38 Light Solutions


Light Solutions 41

Urban Furniture

Not just a lighting manufacturer, DW Windsor offers a wide range of urban furniture products which perfectly reflect our vision; to offer immensely stylish, quality furniture that also delivers on performance.

Many of our products are designed to work alongside our lighting products to ensure completely holistic design solutions can be achieved.

For further information or to register for a catalogue please contact Customer Services: e: [email protected] t: 01992 474600 or visit www.dwwindsor.co.uk

Cube Bench Orchard Theatre, Dartford

40 Light Solutions

Enhancing beautiful spaces

Contemporary

Monaro52 – 57

Monaro LED II52 – 55

Sorento74 – 77

Forza88 – 89

Camaro66 – 73

Toronto84 – 85

Manhattan82 – 83

Evora LED58 – 63

Rio80 – 81

Akord Cone86 – 87

Akord Bullet86 – 87

Barosa78 – 79

Milano LED Bankside, London

Milano44 – 51

Evora58 – 65

73% energy savings achieved with LED

Light EngineBankside case study

Creative styling and high performance are two prerequisites for this range of contemporary luminaires. Whether lighting needs to be discrete or to make a statement, there is a luminaire to enhance any environment including business developments, retail or leisure parks and pedestrian areas.

Designed to maximise performance and aid future-proofing, many ranges are compatible with leading Central Management Systems and/or offer dimming and switching options. In addition, they use LED or other efficient light sources to match styling with performance.

Contemporary 43



Contemporary 45

Milano enhances prestigious urban spaces and architectural landscapes from city centres to corporate car parks.

By day or night the clean lines and simple geometry provide visual empathy with surroundings, as seen at numerous landmark installations including The Gherkin, London.

With an all-aluminium construction and wide range of available light sources including LED, Milano ensures scheme longevity. Energy savings are achievable through a range of leading Central Management Systems or via simple dimming and switching options.

Features• Choice of straight or curved arms

• Wide choice of light sources

• LED provides similar light distribution to Diamond Optic® settings

• CMS compatible or other control options available

• High quality aluminium construction

MilanoIP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

D

Milano offers a choice of straight or curved arms

Milano LED Bankside, London

MilanoInspired by architecture

46 Contemporary


Contemporary 47

Milano St. Marys Axe, The Gherkin, London

48 Contemporary


Contemporary 49

• Energy saving CMS, dimming and switching options

• Now available in LED, with Diamond Optic® equivalent distributions

• Straight arm option available see pages 50 – 51

Product CodesMilano curved arm

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order See inside front cover flap for further details

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

630 700 76 16 0.16m2

Milano curved arm

IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

Suggested column/bracket optionsFor full range of columns and brackets see page 256

5m

4m

3m

2m

1m

6m

*These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

Options

Milano curved arm For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Glazing: Flat toughened glass (standard) Polycarbonate bowl

Mounting: 76mm Ø 89mm Ø (available on request)

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

Light source: See product codes For information on LED Light Engine see pages 32 – 33

Colours: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution

Other: Obtrusive light shield (polycarbonate bowl)

Materials

Base: High pressure die cast aluminium

Arms: High pressure die cast aluminium

Canopy: Spun aluminium

Seals: Silicone rubber

Finish: Polyester powder coated

Installation and Maintenance

Cable termination within product base

Tool-less access via quarter-turn latch and hinged lid

Example

1. Model

MIL MIL

2. Arm Style

C Curved Arms C

3. Glazing

F Flat Toughened Glass F

P Polycarbonate Bowl

4. Mounting

76 76mm Ø 76

5. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources

E Electronic Gear: available for all light sources E

M Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

6. Light Source

050S 50W SON-T+/StreetWise

070S 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise



035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 42W PL-T

057P* 57W PL-T

045W 45W CosmoPolis

060W 60W CosmoPolis

090W 90W CosmoPolis

140W 140W CosmoPolis

L230 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K L230

L245 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

7. Colour – for alternative colours see below

20 RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey 20

8. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution

A 5/35

B 10/10 B

C 31/35

D 5/25

9. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS

N No Photocell

C Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

U Photocell 35lux (1:1) U

PS Part Night Switch Off

PD Part Night Dim

CH CMS Harvard LeafNut

CM CMS Mayflower CLC

CT CMS Telensa PLANet

CZ CMS Zodion Vizion

Example Code = MIL C F 76 E L230 20 B U

Milano LED Heron Tower, London

RAL

9005

10

RAL

9016

40 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

26

RAL

9006

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

DB

DB

703

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25

Diamond Optic® & LED Array Distribution

Optical distributions shown are for both conventional and LED light sources See pages 28 – 33 for details

Mila

no w

ith c

urve

d ar

ms

show

n on

Ta

pere

d Al

umin

ium

5m

col

umn

Mila

no w

ith c

urve

d ar

ms

show

n on

Tub

ular

St

eel 4

m c

olum

n

50 Contemporary


Contemporary 51



• Curved arm option available see pages 48 – 49

Product CodesMilano straight arm


Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

630 700 76 16 0.16m2

Milano straight arm


5m

4m

3m

2m

1m

6m


Example

1. Model

MIL MIL

2. Arm Style

S Straight Arms S

3. Glazing



4. Mounting

76 76mm Ø 76




6. Light Source





035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 42W PL-T

057P* 57W PL-T

045W 45W CosmoPolis

060W 60W CosmoPolis

090W 90W CosmoPolis







A 5/35

B 10/10 B

C 31/35

D 5/25


N No Photocell




PD Part Night Dim





Example Code = MIL S F 76 E L230 20 B U

Options

Milano straight arm For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Glazing: Flat toughened glass (standard) Polycarbonate bowl

Mounting: 76mm Ø 89mm Ø (available on request)





Other: Obtrusive light shield (polycarbonate bowl)

Materials

Base: High pressure die cast aluminium

Arms: High pressure die cast aluminium






Tool-less access via quarter-turn latch and hinged lid

Derby Station

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25




RAL

9005

10

RAL

9016

40 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

26

RAL

9006

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

DB

DB

703

Mila

no w

ith s

traig

ht a

rms

show

n on

Tap

ered

Alu

min

ium

5m

col

umn

Mila

no w

ith s

traig

ht a

rms

show

n on

Tub

ular

Ste

el 4

m c

olum

n


Contemporary 53

Monaro’s low-profile design combines simplicity with functionality. Invisible mounting fixings and flush access latches contribute to a smooth profile to suit any surrounding, from amenity to residential and car park lighting.

Offering optimal road lighting distribution, Monaro is available in a wide range of light sources, including CosmoPolis and LED, providing superior life-time performance. Monaro LED’s unique thermal management system extends life further still, with independent testing certifying in excess of 85,000 hours.

With a future-proof (wholly upgradable) design and virtually zero upward light, Monaro assists the environmentally conscious designer with energy control systems such as CMS and dimming options giving additional efficiencies.

MonaroEngineered for longevity

Features• Wide choice of light sources

• LED version provides similar light distribution to Diamond Optic® setting D


• Direct or side entry mounting

• High quality aluminium construction

MonaroIP66 | IK09 | CLASS I

AMRC building, SheffieldRobust future-proof design

54 Contemporary


Contemporary 55

Monaro LED IIIP66 | IK09 | CLASS I


• Improved efficacy and colour rendering giving increased light output and lower energy consumption (compared with Monaro LED)

• Road distribution equivalent to Diamond Optic® D setting

Product CodesMonaro LED II


Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

610 330 142 13 0.09m2

A

B

C*C

A

B

CC

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m

Example

1. Model

MOR MOR

2. Mounting

S Side Entry

D Direct Entry D

3. Glazing

L Polycarbonate Low Profile Bowl

G Pressed Low Profile Toughened Glass G

4. Light Source

LD40 24 x 2.4W LED – Neutral White 4500K LD40


20 RAL 7016 Anhracite Grey 20

6. LED Array Distribution

D 5/25 D

7. Switching, Dimming & Control

N No Photocell




PD Part Night Dim





Example Code = MOR D G LD40 20 D U

LED Array Distribution

Options

Monaro LED II For mounting at 4 – 6 metres

Mounting: Side entry [42mm Ø] Direct entry [60mm Ø & 76mm Ø] with 0º tilt

Glazing: Polycarbonate low-profile bowl Pressed low-profile toughened glass

Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)

Light source: High performance Cree LEDs

L70 Lifetime prediction: 86,500 hours (independently tested)

Total circuit watts: 63W

Colour temperature: 4500K

Colour rendering index: 70Ra


Optical control: LED Array Distribution

Materials

Body: High pressure die cast aluminium

Access: High pressure die cast latch

Seals: Single piece silicone



Ease of access via quick release latch

Smooth, easy to clean glazing

Clacton Promenade

LED detail

D 5/25

Optical distribution shown is equivalent to the Diamond Optic® D See pages 28 – 31 for details


RAL

9005

10

RAL

9016

40 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

26

RAL

9006

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

DB

DB

703

Mon

aro

LED

II s

how

n on

Tub

ular

Ste

el 5

m c

olum

n w

ith L

inea

r col

umn

brac

ket

Mon

aro

LED

II s

how

n on

Tap

ered

Ste

el 5

m c

olum

n

56 Contemporary


Contemporary 57

MonaroIP66 | IK09 | CLASS I


• LED option available see pages 54 – 55

• Easy clean profile for reduced maintenance

Product CodesMonaro


Side entry

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C C•

610 330 180 142 13 0.09m2

•with low profile glazing


Options

Monaro For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: Side entry [42mm Ø] Direct entry [60mm Ø & 76mm Ø] with 0º & +5º tilt

Glazing: Polycarbonate low-profile bowl [up to 90W only] Polycarbonate deep bowl [100W and above only] Pressed low-profile toughened glass [all wattages]


Light source: See product codes


Optical control: Diamond Optic®

Other: Zebra crossing version available See page 298 – 301 for details

Materials


Access: High pressure die cast latch

Seals: Single piece silicone



Tool-less maintenance via quick release latch and hinged cover

Example

1. Model

MOR MOR

2. Mounting

S Side Entry

D Direct Entry D

3. Glazing

L Polycarbonate Low Profile Bowl (up to 90W max)

D Polycarbonate Deep Bowl (100, 140 & 150W only)

G Low Profile Toughened Glass (all wattages) G


E Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

M Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only M

5. Light Source


070S 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise 070S



035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 42W PL-T

057P* 57W PL-T

045W 45W CosmoPolis

060W 60W CosmoPolis

090W 90W CosmoPolis




7. Diamond Optic® Setting

A 5/35

B 10/10

C 31/35 C

D 5/25

8. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming and CMS

N No Photocell




PD Part Night Dim





Example Code = MOR D G M 070S 20 C U

Victoria Way, Ashford

Diamond Optic®

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25

See pages 28 – 31 for details

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m


RAL

9005

10

RAL

9016

40 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

26

RAL

9006

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

DB

DB

703

Mon

aro

show

n on

Tap

ered

Ste

el 5

m c

olum

n

Mon

aro

show

n on

Tub

ular

Ste

el 5

m c

olum

n w

ith L

inea

r col

umn

brac

ket


Contemporary 59

Tabard Street, Southwark, London

Evora is a contemporary, low-profile luminaire engineered to incorporate the very latest technologies including integral electronic gear and remote monitoring systems.

Available in a wide range of light sources including LED and MasterColour CDM-T Elite MW. With mounting heights up to 10m, Evora’s unrivalled Cool-Zone thermal management offers superior life-time performance.

With a clean, unobtrusive design, without visible fastenings and wide range of bracket options, Evora fits elegantly into any surrounding including road, residential, amenity and car park lighting.

EvoraExceptional thermal management

Features• Wide range of light sources

• LED provides similar light distribution to Diamond Optic® settings


• Main road lighting using new LX1 Luminance Optic

• 8 year guarantee on standard electronic ballasts

EvoraIP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

Uninterrupted profile and tool-less access via push-button latch

Evora shown with C1 column bracket Archer Road, Stevenage

60 Contemporary


Contemporary 61

Evora Tabard Street, London

62 Contemporary


Contemporary 63

Product CodesEvora LED Evora LEDIP66 | IK07 | CLASS I


• See pages 64 – 65 for lamped versions

• Extremely low profile design, without visible fastenings

• High transmission flat glass for enhanced optical performance and zero upward light

• UMSUG approved

Example

1. Model

EVO EVO

2. Mounting

S Side Entry

D Direct Entry D

3. Glazing



4. Control Gear

E Electronic Gear E

5. Light Source

L230 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K L245





7. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance Optic

A 5/35

B 10/10

C 31/35 C

D 5/25


N No Photocell




PD Part Night Dim





Example Code = EVO D F E L245 20 C U

Options

Evora LED For mounting at 4 – 8 metres

Mounting: Side entry [42mm Ø] Direct entry [76mm Ø]

Glazing: Polycarbonate bowl Flat toughened glass

Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)



Optical control: LED Array Distribution

Materials



Latches: High pressure die cast aluminium




Tool-free access via single push button latch for ease of maintenance


5m

4m

3m

7m

2m

6m

1m

Evora C1 Evora C8

Evora C10Evora C9


Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B

Bowl 165 518 17.0 0.07m2

Flat glass 132 518 17.5 0.05m2

Bowl optionLED detail

Evora Chesterton Road, London


A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25


RAL

9005

10

RAL

9016

40 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

26

RAL

9006

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

DB

DB

703

Evor

a sh

own

on T

ubul

ar S

teel

6m

col

umn

with

Lin

ear c

olum

n br

acke

t

Evor

a sh

own

on T

aper

ed S

teel

5m

col

umn

64 Contemporary


Contemporary 65

Product CodesEvora EvoraIP66 | IK07 | CLASS I


• LED version now available (see pages 62 – 63)

• Extremely low profile design, without visible fastenings

• High transmission flat glass for enhanced optical performance and zero upward light

• UMSUG approved

• NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B

Bowl 165 518 17.0 0.07m2

Flat glass 132 518 17.5 0.05m2



Example

1. Model

EVO EVO

2. Mounting

S Side Entry

D Direct Entry D

3. Glazing




E Electronic Gear: available for most light sources E


5. Light Source





250S 250W SON-T+/CDO-TT

035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 42W PL-T

057P* 57W PL-T

060W 60W CosmoPolis

090W 90W CosmoPolis 090W


210W 210W CDM-T Elite MW




A 5/35

B 10/10

C 31/35 C

D 5/25

L LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)


N No Photocell




PD Part Night Dim





Example Code = EVO D F E 090W 20 C U

Options

Evora For mounting at 4 – 10 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W


Glazing: Polycarbonate bowl Flat toughened glass




Optical control: Diamond Optic® LX1 Luminance Optic

Materials



Latches: High pressure die cast aluminium




Tool-free access via single push button latch for ease of maintenance

Edgeware Road, London

Evora C1 Evora C8

Evora C10Evora C9

Bowl option

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

10m

2m

6m

1m

Diamond Optic®

LX1 Luminance Optic


Distribution optimised for main road lighting See pages 34 – 35 for details

The LX1 Luminance Optic is currently available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25


RAL

9005

10

RAL

9016

40 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

26

RAL

9006

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

DB

DB

703

Evor

a sh

own

on T

ubul

ar S

teel

10m

col

umn

with

Lin

ear c

olum

n br

acke

t

Evor

a sh

own

on T

aper

ed S

teel

5m

col

umn


Contemporary 67

CamaroIntelligently designed optics

Features• Compact, circular luminaire

• Performance-engineered optical lens and concave glazing design

• Different lighting distributions with the same look for project continuity

• Suitable for lighting main, residential roads, cycleways and city centres

• Managed LED light output gives in excess of 60,000 hours service life

CamaroIP66 | IK08 | CLASS I

Camaro Road Swindon Cycle Path

Nema and Miniature photocell options available, located off-luminaire to reduce visual impact and ensure ingress protection

Camaro’s slim profile is designed to minimise daytime impact; offering a consistent look for foot paths, from residential roads and car parks to major traffic routes.

Using precisely-positioned, individually directed and controlled LEDs it optimises light output while providing the desired uniformity of distribution. Camaro’s innovative concave glazing design ensures zero upward light above the horizontal, achieving a class-leading glare rating of G6 in the Area and Path models and G3 for Camaro Road.

To help meet your carbon reduction commitments Camaro offers a flexible range of energy management options including basic stand-alone switching and factory-set dimming.

68 Contemporary

Camaro Road, Area, Path

Available in a choice of two colour temperatures: Warm White (3200K) and Neutral White (4000K). Suitable for mounting heights from 4m (22 LEDs) to 12m (108 LEDs), Camaro has a choice of three optical distributions to best-match your project requirements and provide continuity throughout your scheme.

Camaro Road/Area

Camaro Area

Camaro PathCamaro Bracket Options

Smithfield, Dublin

M20 Footbridge, Ashford

Swindon Cycle Path

Camaro RoadDesigned specifically for road lighting, whether high traffic highways or residential street, achieving the higher and more stringent requirements. Providing a neutral white (4000K) and available in 36, 72 or 108 LEDs for mounting at 6 – 12 metres.

Camaro AreaDesigned to maximise the spread of light over a wide area, by providing a 160º beam, ideal for illuminating parks, squares, car parks and typical conflict areas. For mounting at 6 – 12 metres, Camaro Area provides a neutral white (4000K) and is available with 36, 72 or 108 LEDs.

Camaro PathDesigned specifically to distribute light along linear pathways & cycle paths. For mounting at 4 – 6 metres, in an inviting warm white (3200K).

Camaro Road (36 LED) mounted at 8m

Camaro Area (72 LED) mounted at 6m

Camaro Path (22 LED) mounted at 5m

Contemporary 69


Single arm 500mm projection

Single arm 1000mm projection

70 Contemporary

Camaro The Camaro range has been designed solely with LED as its light source, therefore the technical information for this product differs to that of a conventional street lighting product.

Innovative positioning of the LEDs creates a pattern of light by ensuring each LED within the array is optimally orientated to maximise the lighting distribution.

By grouping the LEDs in banks of 12 and adjusting the current accordingly, we can carefully balance the output of the entire product, enhancing the optical performance.

High Efficiency Light System

Performance Engineered

From inception, Camaro’s design has been driven by technology, providing precise lighting control and impressive efficiency. This has been achieved through state-of-the-art LED lenses and an innovative diffusing screen, to reduce refraction.

Camaro’s High Efficiency Lighting System optimises performance and quality of light through meticulous positioning of the LEDs and its uniquely shaped glazing; providing uniform light distribution and glare-free illumination with no light spill above 90º.

Advanced Cooling System

Thermal Management

Key to maximising the life of the LEDs is efficient thermal management. Camaro’s intelligently managed thermal design increases LED life and improves efficiency by maintaining a low junction temperature. Its Advanced Cooling System, an innovative die cast aluminium LED mounting platform with integral cooling fins, ensures effective heat dissipation.

Drive Current Details

Camaro Road

36 LED Version

12 LEDs @ 550mA 12 LEDs @ 530mA 12 LEDs @ 510mA

72 LED Version

48 LEDs @ 320mA 24 LEDs @ 350mA

108 LED Version

108 LEDs @ 350 mA

Camaro Area

36 LED Version


72 LED Version


108 LED Version


Camaro Path

22 LED Version

11 LEDs @ 150mA 11 LEDs @ 300mA

22 LED High Output Version

11 LEDs @ 250mA 11 LEDs @ 500mA

Camaro design philosophy

Camaro key advantages Performance

• High performance Cree LEDs for energy savings, long life and reduced maintenance (in excess of 60,000 hours service life)

• Reduced energy consumption (when compared to conventional light sources) by up to 68%: further savings achievable through the addition of a dimming regime

• Intelligent thermal management, ensures high efficacy and long life of LEDs

• State-of-the-art lens and unique concave glazing provide a uniform light distribution and glare-free illumination, with no light spill above 90º

• Clean, white light: no harmful infra red or ultra violet radiation or chemicals such as mercury

• Instantaneous lighting, even in extremely cold temperatures (down to –40ºC)

Control

• Precise positioning of the LEDs, critical lens design and management of the drive current ensure optimum optical performance and life

Contemporary 71


72 Contemporary


Contemporary 73

Camaro CamaroIP66 | IK08 | CLASS I

• Range of circular, low profile luminaires

• Energy saving dimming and switching options

• Uses long life, energy saving LED

• Consistent look for paths, roads and car park lighting

• Zero light above the horizontal and glare rating G6 (Path & Area) or G3 (Road)

Options

Road For mounting at 6 – 12 metres

Path For mounting at 4 – 6 metres

Area For mounting at 6 – 12 metres

Mounting: Direct entry: 76mm Ø Side entry: 60mm Ø

Glazing: Concave PMMA diffuser

Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear Miniature photocell or on/off switching using Nema socket Factory set dimming options

Light source: High performance Cree LEDs

Road 36 LED (48W) 36 LED High Output (66W) 72 LED (82W) 108 LED (122W)

Path 22 LED (19W) 22 LED High Output (32W)

Area 36 LED (51W) 72 LED (73W) 108 LED (105W)

L70 lifetime prediction: In excess of 60,000 hours

Colour temperature: Path: 3200K (warm white) or Road/Area: 4000K (neutral white)

Colour Rendering Index (CRI): Road/Area: 75Ra Path: 85Ra

Colours: RAL 7012 Textured Basalt Grey RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium

Optical control:

Road Optic distribution designed specifically for main road lighting

Path Optic distribution designed specifically for linear path lighting

Area Optic distribution designed specifically for maximum light spread

Materials


Glazing: PMMA




Supplied with cable tails: Road: 10m Area: 8m Path: 6m

Remote positioning of photocell ensures ingress protection of product during any required maintenance


Path Road

Area

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C D E

Path 93 340 470 240 300 4.5 0.04m2

Road/Area 146 500 750 240 500 10.5 0.08m2

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

10m

2m

6m

1m


Road Path Area Example

1. Model

CAR CAP CAA CAR

2. Light Source

022L 22 LED

022H 22 LED High Output

036L 036L 36 LED

036H 36 LED High Ouput

072L 072L 72 LED 072L

108L 108L 108 LED

3. Colour

16 16 16 Textured Basalt Grey 16

26 26 26 Textured Aluminium

4. Switching, Dimming & Control – factory-set dimming options available on request

N N N No Photocell

C C C Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

U U U Photocell 35lux (1:1) U

PS PS PS Part Night Switch Off

Example Code = CAR 072L 16 U

Product Codes

M20 Footbridge, Ashford

Road/Area

Path

Cam

aro

Area

on

8m c

onic

al c

olum

n

Cam

aro

Path

on

4m tu

bula

r col

umn

Cam

aro

Road

on

10m

con

ical

col

umn


Contemporary 75

Sorento’s timeless design brings elegance to prestigious developments or historic surroundings alike.

Attention to detail provides a truly iconic post-top lighting solution through innovative engineering. Illumination of the graceful supporting arms render the Sorento equally beautiful by day or night.

With an aluminium construction and wide range of light sources including LED, Sorento provides outstanding quality to meet the most onerous technical performance criteria. Efficiencies are achieved through a range of flexible energy management options from basic stand-alone switching to full remote-monitoring integration.

Sorento Timeless iconic design

Features• Tall, slim design

• Aluminium construction

• Choice of light sources including LED

• Effective Diamond Optic® distribution

• Energy control options including CMS

SorentoIP65 | IK07 | CLASS I

Designed in conjunction with Priestmangoode and Speirs & Major Associates

Westfield, Stratford City

76 Contemporary


Contemporary 77

Product CodesSorento


Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

1693 380 76 23 0.22m2

SorentoIP66 | IK07 | CLASS I



• Equally suited to both historic and modern urban spaces

5m

4m

3m

7m

2m

6m

1m


Example

1. Model

SOR SOR

2. Light Source





035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150W CDM-T

045W 45W CosmoPolis

060W 60W CosmoPolis

090W 90W CosmoPolis







A 5/35

B 10/10

C 31/35 C

D 5/25


N No Photocell




PD Part Night Dim





Example Code = SOR 140W 20 C U


Options

Sorento For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: 76mm Ø

Glazing: Flat toughened glass

Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear only Miniature photocell Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)




Materials

Base frame: Cast aluminium

Body: Spun aluminium

Canopy: Cast aluminium

Latch: Stainless steel





Ease of lamp replacement via quick release hinged glass

Sorento with special LED marker Westfield, Stratford City

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25



RAL

9005

10

RAL

9016

40 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

26

RAL

9006

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

DB

DB

703

Sore

nto

show

n on

Tap

ered

Alu

min

um 6

m c

olum

n

Sore

nto

show

n on

spe

cial

wal

l bra

cket

78 Contemporary


Contemporary 79

Product CodesBarosa BarosaIP65 | IK08 | CLASS II

• High-performance flood, spot or asymmetric lighting distributions

• Choice of three bracket styles, multiple arm and single or dual bracket options

• Ideally suited to amenity areas and car park lighting

• All-aluminium construction

Bracket Style 2

ØDØC

B

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C D

400 440 415 188 400 15 0.13m2

350 380 357 166 350 12 0.10m2

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m


Example

1. Model

BAR BAR BAR BAR BAR BAR

2. Optic Styles

350S 350 Spot

350A 350 Asymmetric

350F 350 Flood 350F

400S 400 Spot

400F 400 Flood

3. Light Source

070S 070S 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/ StreetWise

150C 150C 150W CDM-T 150C

250C 250C 250W CDM-T

070HD 70W HQI-TS

150HD 150W HQI-TS



250H 250H 250W HQI-T

400H 400W HQI-T

Example Code = BAR 350F 150C

Options

Barosa 400 For mounting at 6 – 10 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W

Barosa 350 For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W


Optical control: Spot Flood Asymmetric

Bracket options: Bracket Style 1 Bracket Style 2 Bracket Style 3


Colour: RAL 7004 Signal Grey

Materials


Luminaire fixing bracket: Steel

Glazing retainer ring: High pressure die cast aluminium


Seals: Silicone Rubber


Brackets: Steel

Bracket finish: Polyester powder coated

Column clamps: High pressure die cast aluminium

Column clamps finish: Polyester powder coated


Supplied pre-cabled with flexible cable suitable for the column height

Barosa Bracket and Column Combinations Example

Arm Type – 1st Arm

B1 Barosa Bracket Style 1 B1

B2 Barosa Bracket Style 2


Arm Type – 2nd Arm

0 No second arm (1 arm only)



B3 Barosa Bracket Style 3 B3

Column Mounting Diameter

89 89mm Ø 102

102 102mm Ø

140 140mm Ø

Example Code = B1 B3 102

When ordering Barosa please ensure you order the correct number of luminaires for the arm configuration that you want to achieve

Light Distribution

Chippenham Gardens, BrentwoodBracket Style 3Bracket Style 1

Flood Spot

Asymmetric

Baro

sa B

rack

et S

tyle

2 &

Bar

osa

Brac

ket S

tyle

1 c

ombi

natio

n sh

own

on 8

m T

ubul

ar S

teel

col

umn

Baro

sa B

rack

et S

tyle

3 &

Bar

osa

Brac

ket S

tyle

2 c

ombi

natio

n sh

own

on 6

m T

ubul

ar S

teel

col

umn

80 Contemporary


Contemporary 81

Product CodesRio


RioIP65 | IK07 | CLASS I



• Flat glass option for zero upward light

• Coloured central spill light for enhanced decorative effect


Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B

500 276 750 20 0.14m2

450 252 675 17 0.12m2

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

10m

2m

6m

1m


500 450 Example

1. Model

RI5 RI4 RI5

2. Mounting

S S Side Entry S

D D Direct Entry


E E Electronic Gear: available for most light sources E

M M Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

4. Light Source


100S 100S 100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise


250S* 250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C* 035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150C* 150W CDM-T

045W 45W CosmoPolis

060W 60W CosmoPolis

090W 090W 90W CosmoPolis


L230 L230 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245 L245 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

L330 L330 36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K L330



20 20 RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey 20


A A 5/35

B B 10/10 B

C C 31/35

D D 5/25

L L LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps see opposite)


N N No Photocell

C C Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

U U Photocell 35lux (1:1) U

PS PS Part Night Switch Off

PD PD Part Night Dim

CH CH CMS Harvard LeafNut

CM CM CMS Mayflower CLC

CT CT CMS Telensa PLANet

CZ CZ CMS Zodion Vizion

Example Code = RI5 S E L330 20 B U

Options

Rio 500 For mounting at 8 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W

Rio 450 For mounting at 6 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W






Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic

Other: Blue spill light feature Green or white available on request

Materials

Ring: Cast aluminium


Spill light: Acrylic cover

Access: Body coloured stainless steel latches

Entry: Cast aluminium




Easy maintenance via stainless steel quick release latch

St. Martin’s Quarter, Worcester



A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25

LX1 Luminance Optic




RAL

9005

10

RAL

9016

40 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

26

RAL

9006

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

DB

DB

703

Rio

450

show

n on

Tub

ular

Ste

el 6

m c

olum

n w

ith G

ina

colu

mn

brac

ket

Rio

500

show

n on

10m

Tap

ered

Ste

el c

olum

n w

ith d

oubl

e ar

m G

ina

colu

mn

brac

ket

82 Contemporary


Contemporary 83

Product CodesManhattan ManhattanIP65 | IK08 | CLASS I



• All aluminium construction in a sleek, architectural design

ØB

ØC

A

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

810 800 76 18 0.19m2

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m



Example

1. Model

MAN MAN




3. Light Source





035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 42W PL-T

045W 45W CosmoPolis

060W 60W CosmoPolis






81 PAN 7621 Metallic Silver 81


A 5/35

B 10/10

C 31/35 C

D 5/25


N No Photocell


U Photocell 35lux (1:1)


PD Part Night Dim PD





Example Code = MAN E 090W 81 C PD

Options

Manhattan For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: 76mm Ø

Glazing: Clear polycarbonate glazing cone





Materials

Canopy/brim: Spun aluminium

Base: Cast aluminium

Seals: Neoprene



Base has external connector block for ease of maintenance

Access via removable canopy

Chester Railway Station


A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25


Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position


RAL

9005

10

RAL

9016

40 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

26

RAL

9006

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

DB

DB

703

Man

hatta

n sh

own

on T

ubul

ar S

teel

6m

col

umn

with

dou

ble

arm

Ele

ganc

e co

lum

n br

acke

t

Man

hatta

n sh

own

on T

aper

ed A

lum

iniu

m 6

m c

olum

n

84 Contemporary


Contemporary 85

Product CodesToronto TorontoIP65 | IK08 | CLASS I



• All aluminium construction in a sleek, architectural design

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

810 360 76 18 0.18m2

ØB

ØC

A

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m



Example

1. Model

TOR TOR




3. Light Source





035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 42W PL-T

045W 45W CosmoPolis

060W 60W CosmoPolis

090W 90W CosmoPolis





81 PAN 7621 Metallic Silver 81


A 5/35

B 10/10

C 31/35 C

D 5/25


N No Photocell




PD Part Night Dim PD





Example Code = TOR E 140W 81 C PD

Options

Toronto For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: 76mm Ø






Other: Obtrusive light shield(s)

Materials



Seals: Neoprene



Base has external connector block for ease of maintenance

Access via removable canopy




A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25


RAL

9005

10

RAL

9016

40 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

26

RAL

9006

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

DB

DB

703

Toro

nto

show

n on

Tap

ered

Alu

min

ium

6m

col

umn

Toro

nto

show

n on

Tub

ular

Ste

el 5

m c

olum

n

86 Contemporary

Bullet

Cone


Contemporary 87

Product CodesAkord Cone & Akord Bullet Akord Cone &

Akord BulletIP65 | IK08 | CLASS I


• Flat glass for zero upward light


• Choice of entries including unique 30º (Cone) and 45º (Bullet)

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B

Cone A 600 675 25 0.21m2

Cone B 560 630 20 0.18m2

Cone C 385 420 8 0.09m2

Bullet 310 430 9 0.10m2

Bullet


5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

10m

2m

6m

1m

Cone

*These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control† Supplied with remote gear

Akord Cone A

Akord Cone B

Akord Cone C Bullet Example

1. Model

ACA ACB ACC ABU ACB

2. Mounting

S S S S Side Entry Easy-fit™

E E E E Top Entry Easy-fit™ E

3 3 3 30°Easy-fit™

4 45°Easy-fit™


E E E E Electronic Gear: available for most light sources E

M M M M Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

4. Light Source

050S 050S 50W SON-T+/StreetWise



150S 150S* 150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise 150S

250S* 250S* 250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

400S* 400W SON-T+

035C* 035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 042P 42W PL-T

045W† 045W† 45W CosmoPolis

060W 060W† 060W† 60W CosmoPolis




81 81 81 81 PAN 7621 Metallic Silver 81


A A A A 5/35

B B B B 10/10

C C C C 31/35 C

D D D D 5/25

L L LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)

7. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMS Akord Cone: All 250W+ models are fitted with high temperature (105°C) photocells as standard

N N N N No Photocell


U U Photocell 35lux (1:1)


PD PD Part Night Dim PD





Example Code = ACB E E 150S 81 C PD

Options

Akord Cone A For mounting at 8 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W

Akord Cone B For mounting at 6 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W

Akord Cone C & Akord Bullet For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 70W




Mounting: Easy-fit™ side entry, top entry & angled entry (30º – Cone; 45º – Bullet) Cone A & B: [48.3mm Ø] Cone C & Bullet: [42.4mm Ø]

Colours: Top casting: PAN 7621 Metallic Silver Canopy: RAL 9016 White RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey

Optical control: Diamond Optic® LX1 Luminance Optic (Cone A & B)

Other: A range of dedicated brackets are available for Akord Cone & Akord Bullet See page 280

Materials


Top casting: Cast aluminium

Entry: Corrosion protected steel




Easy-fit™ entry connector for ease of installation and accurate luminaire alignment See page 100 for details

Access for Cone A & B via quick release latch

Access for Cone C & Bullet via quarter turn fasteners

Orchard Theatre, Dartford

Diamond Optic®

LX1 Luminance Optic

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25

Distribution optimised for main road lighting. See pages 34 – 35 for details




RAL

9005

10

RAL

9016

40 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

26

RAL

9006

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

DB

DB

703

Akor

d Co

ne A

sho

wn

on T

aper

ed S

teel

8m

col

umn

with

DA

colu

mn

brac

ket

Akor

d Bu

llet s

how

n on

Tub

ular

Ste

el 5

m c

olum

n w

ith C

D c

olum

n br

acke

t

88 Contemporary


Contemporary 89

Example

1. Model

FOR FOR

2. Height

1 5m

2 7m 2

3 9m

3. Mounting

R Root R

F Flange

4. Light Source


090W 90W CosmoPolis


5. Optional LED Path Light

Y LED Array Y

N No Path Light


DB DB 703 – Textured Metallic Dark Grey* DB

7. Switching, Dimming and Control

N No Photocell N



Example Code = FOR 2 R 060W Y DB N

Forz

a 1

Forz

a 2

Forz

a 3

Product CodesForza ForzaIP66 | IK10 | CLASS I

• Contemporary style light stack, with slim profile and integral optics

• With performance micro road lighting optic

• Optional secondary window for LED pathway lighting

*For an alternative colour, replace DB with the two digit number of the colour you require

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C

1 5000 245 4500 135

2 7000 245 6400 190

3 9000 245 8500 245

Options

Forza 1 5.0m

Forza 2 7.0m

Forza 3 9.0m

Mounting: With root or flange plate mounting

Gear, switching and control: Miniature photocell available Electronic control gear



Optical control: Miniature dichroic glass optic

Materials:

Column: Galvanised steel

Glazing: Flat glass

Finish: Two-pack acrylic wet spray-paint finish


Access to lamp via flat glass glazing

Door for cable entry

Optical Distribution

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m

ØB

AC


RAL

9005

10

RAL

9016

40 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

26

RAL

9006

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

DB

DB

703

Cradle Grants Quay, London dwwindsor.com | [email protected]

Classic 91

Timeless simplicity

ClassicIncorporating the Optima series

Stratum92 – 93

Excel94 – 95

Dover96 – 97

Cradle98 – 99

Corvus104 – 105

Technical Details (Optima Series)100 – 101

Crieff102 – 103

Polar98 – 99

Understated design with minimal

decorative detail

Contemporary with minimal decorative detail, our simply styled Classic range of luminaires incorporates our popular and established Optima series.

Constructed from robust and durable materials, its understated and harmonious design, based around a precision die cast aluminium ring, is complementary to road or car park lighting, in residential, retail, leisure or business developments.

Performance can be enhanced with stand-alone or centrally managed dimming and switching systems and the most up to date light sources, including LED, Philips CosmoPolis and GE StreetWise. Control options include our patented Diamond Optic® reflector and newly available LX1 Luminance Optic, for optimal main road lighting.

92 Classic


Classic 93

StratumIP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

Stratum Options

Stratum 500 For mounting at 8 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W 400W supplied with external gearbox for details see page 100

Stratum 450 For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: Direct entry [76mm Ø] Side entry [42mm Ø] Easy-fit™ top entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded top entry [1¼” BSP] Gearbox has side or direct entry (500 version)

Glazing: Flat toughened glass Polycarbonate bowl Acrylic bowl



Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy


Other: Obtrusive light shield(s) for bowl only

Zebra crossing version available See pages 298 – 301 for details

Materials

Ring: Die cast aluminium


Direct/Side Entry: Die cast aluminium

Top Entry: Corrosion protected steel





Ease of maintenance via quick- release latches which retain glazing

Top entry version available with Easy-fit™ connector for ease of installation and accurate luminaire alignmentSee page 100 for details • Energy saving CMS, dimming and

switching options


• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 32 – 33)



ØB

A

ØB

ADimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

Stratum A B

500 320 550 14.6 0.13m2

500• 215 550 16.1 0.10m2

450 285 500 13.2 0.11m2

450• 202 500 13.7 0.09m2

•with flat glass For further dimensional information see page 100

Product Codes

* These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control

500 450 Example1. ModelST5 ST4 ST42. MountingD D Direct Entry DS S Side Entry

E Top Entry Easy-fit™T Top Entry Threaded

3. GlazingP P Polycarbonate BowlF F Flat Toughened Glass F4. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sourcesE E Electronic Gear: available for most light sources EM M Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only5. Light Source

050S 50W SON-T+/StreetWise070S 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S 100S 100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise150S 150S 150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise250S 250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise400S* 400W SON-T+ (gearbox mounted)

035C* 35W CDM-T070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150C* 150W CDM-T042P 42W PL-T057P* 57W PL-T045W 45W CosmoPolis060W 60W CosmoPolis

090W 090W 90W CosmoPolis140W 140W 140W CosmoPolisL230 L230 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000KL245 L245 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K L245L330 L330 36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000KL345 L345 36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K6. Colour – for alternative colours see below20 20 RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey 2004 04 RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy7. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance OpticA A 5/35 AB B 10/10C C 31/35D D 5/25L L LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)8. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMSN N No PhotocellC C Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)U U Photocell 35lux (1:1) UPS PS Part Night Switch OffPD PD Part Night DimCH CH CMS Harvard LeafNutCM CM CMS Mayflower CLCCT CT CMS Telensa PLANetCZ CZ CMS Zodion VizionExample Code = ST4 D F E L245 20 A U

Elmer Approach, Southend


RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

Flat glass




A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25


LX1 Luminance Optic

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

10m

2m

6m

1m

Suggested column/ bracket optionsFor full range of columns and brackets see page 256

Stra

tum

500

gea

rbox

ver

sion

sho

wn

on T

ubul

ar S

teel

10m

col

umn

with

Lin

ear c

olum

n br

acke

t

Stra

tum

450

sho

wn

on T

ubul

ar S

teel

5m

col

umn

94 Classic


Classic 95

ExcelIP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

Excel

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

10m

2m

6m

1m


Product Codes Options

Excel 500 For mounting at 8 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W 400W supplied with external gearbox for details see page 100

Excel 450 For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: Direct entry [76mm Ø] Side entry [42mm Ø] Easy-fit™ top entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded top entry [1¼” BSP] Gearbox has side or direct entry (500 version)








Materials










Top entry versions available with Easy-fit™ connector for ease of installation and accurate luminaire alignmentSee page 100 for details


ØB

A

ØB

ADimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

Excel A B

500 388 550 14.6 0.16m2

500• 265 550 16.1 0.11m2

450 354 500 13.2 0.14m2

450• 235 500 13.7 0.10m2



• Retrofit LED Light Engine option available (see pages 32– 33)





500 450 Example

1. Model

EX5 EX4 EX5

2. Mounting

D D Direct Entry D

S S Side Entry

E E Top Entry Easy-fit™

T T Top Entry Threaded

3. Glazing

P P Polycarbonate Bowl

F F Flat Toughened Glass F




5. Light Source






400S* 400W SON-T+ (gearbox mounted)

035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 42W PL-T

057P* 57W PL-T

045W 45W CosmoPolis

060W 60W CosmoPolis






L345 L345 36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K L345


20 20 RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey 20

04 04 RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy


A A 5/35 A

B B 10/10

C C 31/35

D D 5/25



N N No Photocell









Example Code = EX5 D F E L345 20 A U

Christchurch, New Zealand

Flat glass




A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25

LX1 Luminance Optic


RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

Exce

l 500

sho

wn

on T

ubul

ar S

teel

8m

col

umn

with

May

a co

lum

n br

acke

t

Exce

l 450

sho

wn

on M

agna

6m

col

umn

with

Gen

us c

olum

n br

acke

t

96 Classic


Classic 97

DoverIP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

Dover

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

10m

2m

6m

1m



Dover 500 For mounting at 8 – 10 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W 400W supplied with external gearbox for details see page 100

Dover 450 For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: Direct entry [76mm Ø] Side entry [42mm Ø] Easy-fit™ top entry [42.4mm Ø] (450 version) Threaded top entry [1¼” BSP] (450 version)








Materials










Top entry version available with Easy-fit™ connector for ease of installation and accurate luminaire alignmentSee page 100 for details







Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

Dover A B

500 354 760 16.2 0.17m2

500• 245 760 17.1 0.13m2

450 318 690 14.7 0.13m2

450• 229 690 15.2 0.10m2

ØB

A

ØB

A* These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control




A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25


LX1 Luminance Optic

500 450 Example

1. Model

DO5 DO4 DO5

2. Mounting

D D Direct Entry

S S Side Entry S

E Top Entry Easy-fit™

T Top Entry Threaded

3. Glazing






5. Light Source






400S* 400W SON-T+ (gearbox mounted)

035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 42W PL-T

057P* 57W PL-T

045W 45W CosmoPolis

060W 60W CosmoPolis








27 27 RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey 27

04 04 RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy


A A 5/35

B B 10/10

C C 31/35 C

D D 5/25



N N No Photocell









Example Code = DO5 S F E L330 27 C U

Edge Lane, Liverpool

With bowl


RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

Dov

er 5

00 s

how

n on

Tub

ular

Ste

el 8

m c

olum

n w

ith L

inea

r col

umn

brac

ket

Dov

er 4

50 s

how

n on

Tap

ered

Ste

el 6

m c

olum

n w

ith

doub

le a

rm L

inea

r col

umn

brac

ket a

nd o

ptio

nal S

pike

fini

al

98 Classic Classic 99

Polar & CradleIP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

Cradle

Polar

Polar & Cradle





• NEW LX1 Luminance Optic available (Polar)

Pola

r 500

sho

wn

on C

ardi

ff 8m

col

umn

with

Gen

us c

olum

n br

acke

t

Crad

le 4

50 (F

lat g

lass

opt

ion)

sho

wn

on T

ubul

ar S

teel

6m

co

lum

n w

ith d

oubl

e ar

m G

enus

col

umn

brac

ket

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m


Polar 500 For mounting at 8 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W 400W supplied with external gearbox for details see page 100

Polar 450 & Cradle 450 For mounting at 4 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: Polar Direct entry [76mm Ø] Side entry [42mm Ø] Easy-fit™ top entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded top entry [1¼” BSP] Gearbox has side or direct entry (500 version)

Cradle 76mm Ø





Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic (Polar)


Zebra crossing version available (Polar) See pages 298 – 301 for details

Materials



Direct/Side Entry (Polar): Die cast aluminium

Top Entry (Polar): Corrosion protected steel

Entry (Cradle): Metal sprayed steel







Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

Polar 500 500 550 14.6 0.21m2

Polar 500• 305 550 16.1 0.14m2

Polar 450 450 500 13.2 0.17m2

Polar 450* 280 500 13.7 0.12m2

Cradle 450 590 590 76 18.0 0.20m2

Cradle 450• 590 590 76 18.9 0.15m2



Distribution optimised for main road lighting See pages 34 –35 for details


A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25


LX1 Luminance Optic


Polar 500

Polar 450

Cradle 450 Example

1. ModelPO5 PO4 CR4 PO42. MountingD D Direct EntryS S Side Entry SE E Top Entry Easy-fit™T T Top Entry Threaded3. GlazingP P P Polycarbonate BowlF F F Flat Toughened Glass F4. Control Gear – check compatibility with light sources

E E E Electronic Gear: available for most light sources E

M M M Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only5. Light Source

050S 050S 50W SON-T+/StreetWise070S 070S 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

100S 100S 100S 100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise150S 150S 150S 150W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise250S 250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise400S* 400W SON-T+ (gearbox mounted)

035C* 035C* 35W CDM-T070C* 070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150C* 150C* 150W CDM-T042P 042P 42W PL-T057P* 057P* 57W PL-T045W 045W 45W CosmoPolis060W 060W 60W CosmoPolis

090W 090W 090W 90W CosmoPolis140W 140W 140W 140W CosmoPolis

L230 L230 L230 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L245 L245 L245 24 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K

L330 L330 L330 36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Warm White 3000K

L345 L345 L345 36 x 2.4W LED Light Engine – Neutral White 4500K L345

6. Colour – for alternative colours see below20 20 20 RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey 2004 04 04 RAL 9005 Black ring with anodised canopy7. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/LX1 Luminance OpticA A A 5/35 AB B B 10/10C C C 31/35D D D 5/25


8. Switching, Dimming & Control – electronic gear is required for dimming & CMSN N N No PhotocellC C C Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)U U U Photocell 35lux (1:1) UPS PS PS Part Night Switch OffPD PD PD Part Night DimCH CH CH CMS Harvard LeafNutCM CM CM CMS Mayflower CLCCT CT CT CMS Telensa PLANetCZ CZ CZ CMS Zodion VizionExample Code = PO4 S F E L345 20 A U

Grants Quay, London

A

ØC

ØBØB

A

ØB

A



Polar with bowl Cradle with flat glass


RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005


Classic 101100 Classic

Technical Details

Optima SeriesIP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

Entry Types

Direct Entry

For luminaires to be fitted directly to columns.

These four entry types apply to Stratum, Excel, Dover and Polar.

Cradle and Crieff are available as post-mounted products only and Corvus has top entry options.

Top Entry

For suspension from pendant brackets, canopies and ceilings. Two versions are offered; the Easy-fit™ for ease of installation and luminaire alignment, and the standard BSP threaded.

B

A

A

B

B

A

Direct Entry A A (Dover) B

450 643 738 336

500 693 798 355

Direct/Side Entry 400W Gearbox

For housing 250W electronic gear or 400W magnetic gear (Dover, Stratum, Excel and Polar). Available as side entry or direct entry.

B

A

A

B

B

A

Direct/Side Entry 400W Gearbox A B

500 925 650

Side Entry

For use with columns and wall brackets.

B

A

A

B

B

A

Side Entry A A (Dover) B

450 620 715 377

500 670 775 395

Excel

Polar Cradle

Dover

Stratum

Ropetackle, Shoreham-by-Sea

Easy-fit™ The Easy-fit™entry, which is our own design, both simplifies luminaire alignment and eliminates the problem of twisted cabling associated with threaded entries. This is compatible with most of our wall and column brackets.

Threaded The threaded entry is the conventional method of mounting the luminaire and is compatible with most new and existing bracket types.

102 Classic


Classic 103

Crieff Product Codes Options

Crieff For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: 76mm Ø

Glazing: Polycarbonate bowl



Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey PAN 7621 Metallic Silver RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green



Materials



Entry: Galvanised steel





Base has external connector block for ease of installation

Ease of maintenance via quick- release latches

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

690 700 76 16.3 0.23m2

ØC

A

ØB

ØC

A

ØB

ØC

ØB

CrieffIP66 | IK07 | CLASS I



• Easy Installation and Maintenance



Example

1. Model

CRF CRF

2. Glazing

P Polycarbonate Bowl P




4. Light Source





035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 42W PL-T

057P* 57W PL-T

045W 45W CosmoPolis

060W 60W CosmoPolis





27 RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey 27


A 5/35

B 10/10

C 31/35 C

D 5/25


N No Photocell

C Photocell 70lux (1:0.5) C



PD Part Night Dim





Example Code = CRF P E 090W 27 C C

Lyng Lang Homezone, Birmingham


A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25



RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

Crie

ff sh

own

on T

aper

ed A

lum

iniu

m 5

m c

olum

n

Crie

ff sh

own

on T

ubul

ar S

teel

6m

col

umn

with

do

uble

arm

Roc

o co

lum

n br

acke

t

104 Classic


Classic 105

Corvus Product Codes CorvusIP66 | IK07 | CLASS I






5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

10m

2m

6m

1m


ØB

A

ØB

A•with flat glass

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

Corvus A B

A 870 681 17.3 0.24m2

A• 686 681 17.8 0.18m2

B 710 612 13.3 0.17m2

B• 636 612 13.9 0.15m2

A B Example

1. Model

COA COB COA

2. Mounting

E E Top Entry Easy-fit™ E


3. Glazing




E E Electronic Gear: available for all light sources E


5. Light Source





035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 042P 42W PL-T

057P* 057P* 57W PL-T

045W 45W CosmoPolis









81 81 PAN 7621 Metallic Silver 81


A A 5/35

B B 10/10

C C 31/35 C

D D 5/25



N N No Photocell









Example Code = COA E F E L330 81 C U

Ravenswood, Ipswich

Bowl version

Options

Corvus A For mounting at 6 – 8 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Corvus B For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W

Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded entry [1¼” BSP]







Materials











RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005




A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25

LX1 Luminance Optic


Corv

us B

(Fla

t gla

ss o

ptio

n) s

how

n on

Am

ax 6

m c

olum

n w

ith A

rc c

olum

n br

acke

t

Corv

us A

sho

wn

on T

ubul

ar S

teel

8m

col

umn

with

Inve

rted

Gen

us c

olum

n br

acke

t

Traditional 107Traditional 107

Attention to detail

Traditional

Lancaster112 – 113

LED Light Engine108 – 109

Berkeley118 – 119

Knightsbridge114 – 115

Windsor110 – 111

Westminster116 – 117

Strand120 – 123

Portland118 – 119

Ely124 – 127

Hatfield132 – 133

Strand/Ely Technical128 – 129

York134 – 135

Iffley130 – 131

Warwick134 – 135

Waterford138 – 139

Newport136 – 137

Braemar138 – 139

Salisbury136 – 137

Henley140 – 141

Pall Mall116 – 117

Period styling is at the heart of this range of luminaires, spanning from traditional heritage lanterns with authentic detailing and ornate brackets to luminaires from more recent times.

Crafted from copper or aluminium to ensure longevity and with a selection of harmonious columns and brackets (see page 256), the Traditional range is complementary to a wide range of building styles and environments and thus a popular choice for residential developments and town centres.

Specified for their performance or simply for their timeless design, this collection now benefits from up-to-date technologies, including LED, with energy-saving options available through central management system compatibility and our high performance Diamond Optic® or LX1 Luminance Optic.

Crafted from copper or

aluminium to ensure longevity

Ely Ingress Park, Dartford dwwindsor.com | [email protected]

Traditional 109108 Traditional


LED Light Engine

LED Light Engine Whether your driver for specifying LED is energy savings, reducing maintenance costs or simply a desire to employ the very latest technology, your product design choice may, up until now, have been restricted to contemporary style luminaires.

Designed to fit effortlessly within the majority of our exterior lighting luminaires including the Traditional range shown in the following pages, the LED Light Engine is available in new luminaires or as a retrofit option for installation in DW Windsor products up to ten years of age.

For full technical details on LED Light Engine, please refer to pages 32 – 33.

Ponsonby Place, London

Traditional lanterns

Available for new or retrofit

Windsor, Strand, Ely, Iffley

Available new only

Lancaster, Knightsbridge, Pall Mall, Westminster, Hatfield, York, Warwick, Newport, Salisbury, Waterford, Braemar, Henley

Other lanterns

Available for new or retrofit

Rio, Stratum, Excel, Dover, Polar, Cradle, Crieff, Corvus, DW400

Available new only

Milano LED, Evora LED

Traditional 109

Key advantages• LED Light Engine gives you the option

to specify LED as a light source

• Now available for Traditional lanterns

• Available as retrofit LED solution for existing DW Windsor schemes

• Available in brand new products (see opposite for ranges)

• Significant energy savings and reduced maintenance costs

• Equivalent distribution to Diamond Optic® A, B, C & D

• Multi-layer LED Light Engine



WindsorIP65 | IK08 | CLASS I




• Corrosion resistant, copper construction

ØC

B

DA


Optional cast baseDimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

Windsor A B C D

Street 833 440 76 188 10.3 0.28m2

Avenue 745 390 76 119 8.3 0.22m2

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m

Product CodesWindsor


Street Avenue Example

1. Model

WIS WIA WIS

2. Mounting

F F Frog F

C Cast Base




4. Light Source





035C* 035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 042P 42W PL-T

057P* 057P* 57W PL-T

045W 45W CosmoPolis

060W 60W CosmoPolis

090W 90W CosmoPolis




10 10 RAL 9005 Black 10


A A 5/35 A

B B 10/10

C C 31/35

D D 5/25


N N No Photocell









Example Code = WIS F E L230 10 A U

Options

Windsor Street For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Windsor Avenue For mounting at 2.5 – 5 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 70W

Mounting: Traditional frog (standard) Cast base (Windsor Street only) [76mm Ø]

Glazing: Polycarbonate one piece bowl Acrylic one piece bowl (on request) Toughened flat glass (on request)



Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red Natural Copper Finish NB Natural copper finish will rapidly weather usually giving a rich patina finish Polished and Lacquered Copper Finish



Materials

Body: Copper

Standard frog: Metal sprayed steel

Cast base: Cast aluminium


Finish: Polyester powder coated or copper


Frog and cast base have external connector blocks for ease of installation

Tool-less maintenance via hinged, sealed canopy with retaining stay and slide latches





RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

70

RAL

3005

Nat

ural

cop

per

02 03

Polis

hed

&

lacq

uere

d co

pper

Windsor LED St Paul’s Churchyard, London

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25

Win

dsor

Ave

nue

show

n on

Orn

ate

Cast

wal

l box

bra

cket

Win

dsor

Stre

et s

how

n on

Oxf

ord

4m c

olum

n


Lancaster


A

ØC

B

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

725 410 76 12.5 0.22m2

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m


Example

1. Model

LAS LAS




3. Light Source


070S 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/SteetWise



035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 42W PL-T

057P* 57W PL-T

045W 45W CosmoPolis

060W 60W CosmoPolis

090W 90W CosmoPolis




10 RAL 9005 Black 10


A 5/35

B 10/10

C 31/35 C

D 5/25


N No Photocell




PD Part Night Dim





Example Code = LAS E L245 10 C U

Product CodesLancaster

*These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS controlSuggested column/ bracket optionsFor full range of columns and brackets see page 256






Options

Lancaster For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: Steel spigot plate [76mm Ø]

Glazing: Polycarbonate one piece bowl (standard) Acrylic one piece bowl






Materials

Body: Copper

Spigot plate: Metal sprayed steel




Spigot has external connector block for ease of installation




RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

70

RAL

3005

Nat

ural

cop

per

02 03

Polis

hed

&

lacq

uere

d co

pper

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25

Hertford County Hospital

Lanc

aste

r sho

wn

on N

ewca

stle

5m

col

umn

with

opt

iona

l lad

der b

ars

Lanc

aste

r sho

wn

on P

lain

Cas

t wal

l bra

cket


Knightsbridge


AC. B

A

ØC

D

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

Knightsbridge A B C D

Street 890 610 76 105 12.5 0.32m2

Avenue 741 510 76 110 10.5 0.28m2


5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m

Product CodesKnightsbridgeStreet Avenue Example

1. Model

KNS KNA KNS




3. Light Source





035C* 035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 042P 42W PL-T

057P* 57W PL-T

045W 45W CosmoPolis

060W 60W CosmoPolis





10 10 RAL 9005 Black 10


A A 5/35 A

B B 10/10

C C 31/35

D D 5/25


N N No Photocell N









Example Code = KNS E 090W 10 A N


Options

Knightsbridge Street For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Knightsbridge Avenue For mounting at 2.5 – 5 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W

Mounting: Traditional frog [76mm Ø]

Glazing: Polycarbonate one piece bowl (standard) Acrylic one piece bowl






Materials

Body: Copper

Frog: Metal sprayed steel




Frog has external connector block for ease of installation







RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

70

RAL

3005

Nat

ural

cop

per

02 03

Polis

hed

&

lacq

uere

d co

pper

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25



For Knightsbridge Avenue only: Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position

Oamaru, New Zealand

Knig

htsb

ridge

Stre

et s

how

n on

Oxf

ord

5m c

olum

n

Knig

htsb

ridge

Stre

et s

how

n on

Orn

ate

Cast

wal

l bra

cket


Westminster & Pall Mall


ØB

AD

ØC

Pall Mall

Pall MallWestminster

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C D

Westminster 787 420 76 115 10.5 0.20m2

Pall Mall 787 397 76 115 10.2 0.20m2

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m


Product CodesWestminster & Pall Mall Westminster Pall Mall Example

1. Model

WES PAL PAL


E E Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

M M Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only M

3. Light Source


070S 070S 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise 070S


035C* 035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 070C* 70W CDM-T

042P 042P 42W PL-T







10 10 RAL 9005 Black 10


A A 5/35 A

B B 10/10

C C 31/35

D D 5/25


N N No Photocell

C C Photocell 70lux (1:0.5) C








Example Code = PAL M 070S 10 A C


Options

Westminster & Pall Mall For mounting at 4 – 5 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W

Mounting: Traditional frog [76mm Ø]

Glazing: Polycarbonate one piece glazing cone (standard) Acrylic one piece glazing cone






Materials

Body: Copper

Coronet (Westminster): Aluminium (painted)





Frog has external connector block for ease of installation

Access is via the removable canopy





ØB

A�

Ø�

Westminster


RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

70

RAL

3005

Nat

ural

cop

per

02 03

Polis

hed

&

lacq

uere

d co

pper

Copper – polished & lacquered

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25




Westminster Shepherds Market, London

Wes

tmin

ster

sho

wn

on C

ambr

idge

5m

col

umn

Pall

Mal

l sho

wn

on N

orw

ich

4m c

olum

n


Portland & Berkeley


ØB

A

ØB

A

Berkeley

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B

Portland 600 397 7.6 0.17m2

Berkeley 600 428 7.9 0.17m2

Portland

Berk

eley

sho

wn

on C

hest

er 5

m c

olum

n w

ith

doub

le a

rm C

ast O

rnat

e co

lum

n br

acke

t

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m




Copper – polished and lacquered option

Product CodesPortland & Berkeley Portland Berkeley Example

1. Model

POR BER BER

2. Mounting

E E Top Entry Easy-fit™

T T Top Entry Threaded T


E E Electronic Gear: available for all light sources

M M Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only M

4. Light Source



100S 100S 100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise 100S

035C* 035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 070C* 70W CDM-T

042P 042P 42W PL-T





10 10 RAL 9005 Black 10


A A 5/35 A

B B 10/10

C C 31/35

D D 5/25


N N No Photocell



PS PS Part Night Switch Off PS






Example Code = BER T M 100S 10 A PS


Options

Portland & Berkeley For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W

Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded entry [1” BSP] (standard)

Glazing: Polycarbonate one piece glazing bowl (standard) Acrylic one piece glazing bowl






Materials

Body: Copper

Coronet (Berkeley): Aluminium (painted)


Access: Body coloured, stainless steel latches




Available with Easy-fit™ entry connector for ease of installation and accurate lantern alignment See pages 128 – 129 for details

Tool-less maintenance via stainless steel quick release latches

Portland Berkeley


RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

70

RAL

3005

Nat

ural

cop

per

02 03

Polis

hed

&

lacq

uere

d co

pper

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25

Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position See pages 28 – 31 for details

Diamond Optic®

Portland New Broad Street, London

Port

land

sho

wn

on C

ardi

ff 6m

col

umn

with

Hoo

p co

lum

n br

acke

t


Strand A & A Plus

dwwindsor.com | [email protected]•Narrow Brim (Strand A only)

ØB

A

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

Strand A B B•

A 643 670 527 11.5 0.19m2

A Plus 870 900 18.0 0.35m2


5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

10m

2m

6m

1m




• New LX1 Luminance Optic available

• The Strand is available in four proportionately identical sizes for schemes from high traffic routes to residential developments

Product CodesStrand A & A PlusA A Plus Example

1. Model

STA STP Standard model (Tear drop glazing & wide brim) STA

2. Mounting




E E Electronic Gear: available for most light sources** E


4. Light Source




400S* 400W SON-T+

150C* 150W CDM-T

090W 90W CosmoPolis







10 10 RAL 9005 Black 10

6. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/ LX1 Luminance Optic

A A 5/35 A

B B 10/10

C C 31/35

D D 5/25



N N No Photocell





CH CH CMS Harvard LeafNut CH




Example Code = STA E E 140W 10 A CH


*These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control**400W gear is magnetic only, 250W gear in Strand A is magnetic only

Options


Options

Strand A For mounting at 7 – 10 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W

Strand A Plus For mounting at 10 – 12 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 400W

Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø] (Strand A) Easy-fit™ entry [48mm Ø] (Strand A Plus) Threaded entry [1¼” BSP]

Glazing: Polycarbonate tear drop bowl (standard) Polycarbonate round bowl (Strand A only) See pages 128 – 129 for details



Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green RAL 3005 Wine Red



Narrow brim (Strand A) See pages 128 – 129 for details

Zebra crossing version (Strand A) See pages 298 – 301 for details

Materials



Access: Body coloured stainless steel quick release latches







RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

70

RAL

3005

LX1 Luminance Optic


A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25

Distribution optimised for main road lighting See page 34 for details

The LX1 Luminance Optic is only available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types

Knightsbridge, London

Stra

nd A

sho

wn

on E

dinb

urgh

8m

col

umn

with

Tra

ditio

nal S

crol

l col

umn

brac

ket

Stra

nd A

Plu

s sh

own

on C

hest

er 1

0m c

olum

n w

ith s

peci

al A

rc c

olum

n br

acke

t


Strand B & C


ØB

A

•Narrow Brim

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

Strand A B B•

B 575 585 484 8.5 0.15m2

C 498 480 396 5.5 0.11m2

Stra

nd B

sho

wn

on C

ardi

ff 6m

col

umn

with

Tra

ditio

nal H

oop

colu

mn

brac

ket

Stra

nd B

with

Squ

are

U br

acke

t on

New

cast

le

5m c

olum

n w

ith o

ptio

nal l

adde

r bar

s

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m


Product CodesStrand B & CB C Example

1. Model

STB STC Standard model (Tear drop glazing & wide brim) STB

2. Mounting



U U Square U Bracket

3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light source



4. Light Source





035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150W CDM-T

057P* 57W PL-T

045W 045W 45W CosmoPolis**

060W 60W CosmoPolis

090W 90W CosmoPolis






10 10 RAL 9005 Black 10


A A 5/35

B B 10/10

C C 31/35

D D 5/25 D


N N No Photocell









Example Code = STB E E L230 10 D C

*These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control**45W CosmoPolis in Strand C is not compatible with Telensa or Mayflower CMSSuggested column/

bracket optionsFor full range of columns and brackets see page 256


Options

Strand B For mounting at 4 – 7 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Strand C For mounting at 2.5 – 5 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W

Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded entry [1” BSP] Post top “U” brackets See pages 128 – 129 for details

Glazing: Polycarbonate tear drop bowl (standard) Polycarbonate round bowl (Strand B only) See pages 128 – 129 for details






Narrow brim See pages 128 – 129 for details

Zebra crossing version See pages 298 – 301 for details

Materials







Available with Easy-fit™ entry connector for ease of installation and accurate lantern alignment See pages 128-129 for details



Strand C only: Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25




• The Strand is available in four proportionately identical sizes for schemes from high traffic routes to residential developments


RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

70

RAL

3005

Poundbury, Dorset


Ely


Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

Ely A B B•

A 638 670 527 11.5 0.17m2

B 575 585 484 8.5 0.14m2

C 489 480 396 5.5 0.10m2


Ely

A sh

own

on E

dinb

urgh

8m

col

umn

with

Tra

ditio

nal H

oop

colu

mn

brac

ket

Ely

C sh

own

on C

ardi

ff 5m

col

umn

with

Sw

an N

eck

colu

mn

brac

ket

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m

Product CodesElyA B C Example

1. Model

ELA ELB ELC Standard model (Tear drop glazing & wide brim) ELB

2. Mounting

E E E Top Entry Easy-fit™

T T T Top Entry Threaded T

U U Tear Drop U Bracket

3. Control Gear – check compatibility with light source

E E E Electronic Gear: available for most light sources E

M M M Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only

4. Light Source






035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 042P 42W PL-T

057P* 57W PL-T

045W 045W 45W CosmoPolis**

060W 60W CosmoPolis








10 10 10 RAL 9005 Black 10

6. Diamond Optic® Setting/LED Array Distribution/ LX1 Luminance Optic

A A A 5/35 A

B B B 10/10

C C C 31/35

D D D 5/25

L LX1 Luminance Optic (selected lamps – see opposite)


N N N No Photocell

C C C Photocell 70lux (1:0.5)

U U U Photocell 35lux (1:1)

PS PS PS Part Night Switch Off

PD PD PD Part Night Dim PD

CH CH CH CMS Harvard LeafNut

CM CM CM CMS Mayflower CLC

CT CT CT CMS Telensa PLANet

CZ CZ CZ CMS Zodion Vizion

Example Code = ELB T E L245 10 A PD

*These lamp types cannot be used with dimming or CMS control**45W CosmoPolis in Ely is not compatible with Telensa or Mayflower CMSSuggested column/





• New LX1 Luminance Optic available (Ely A only)

• The Ely is available in three proportionately identical sizes for schemes from high traffic routes to residential developments

Options

Ely A For mounting at 7 – 10 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 250W

Ely B For mounting at 4 – 7 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Ely C For mounting at 2.5 – 5 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W

Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø]

Threaded entry: Ely A [1¼” BSP] Ely B/C [1” BSP]

Post top “U” brackets See pages 128 – 129 for details

Glazing: Polycarbonate tear drop bowl (standard)




Optical control: Diamond Optic® LED Array Distribution LX1 Luminance Optic (Ely A only)


Narrow brim See pages 128 – 129 for details


Materials









•Narrow Brim

ØB

A


RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

70

RAL

3005


LX1 Luminance Optic

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25


For Ely C only: Due to physical restrictions, with 100W SON-T+ or CDO-TT lamps, setting A is not available and setting C can achieve a maximum 25/25 reflector position

Ely A only

Distribution optimised for main road lighting See page 34 for details

The LX1 Luminance Optic is only available with 90W/140W CosmoPolis & 100W/150W SON lamp types

Ingress Park, Dartford


dwwindsor.com | [email protected] Ingress Park, Dartford

Traditional 127



Top Entry

The Strand and Ely Ranges are offered with either a threaded entry or our Easy-fit™ entry.

Strand Poundbury, Dorset

Strand & Ely Technical Details


Ely tear drop glazing: wide brim Ely tear drop glazing: narrow brim

ØB ØB

A

A

ØB

A

Glazing & Brim Options

Strand tear drop glazing: wide brim Strand tear drop glazing: narrow brim

Strand round glazing: wide brim Strand round glazing: narrow brim

•Narrow Brim

•Narrow Brim

Entry Types

The threaded entry is the conventional method of mounting the luminaire and is compatible with most new and existing bracket types.

Threaded

Easy-fit™

The Easy-fit™ entry, which is our own design, both simplifies luminaire alignment and eliminates the problem of twisted cabling associated with threaded entries. This is compatible with most of our wall and column brackets.

“U” Bracket Entry

“U” Bracket Entry

“U” brackets allow the Strand and Ely (B and C sizes) to be mounted as post top luminaires.

For the Strand there are three different styles of “U” bracket; a traditional square design (for either the tear drop or round glazing bowl) and two designs that closely follow the shape of either the round or tear drop glazing.

For the Ely there are two different styles of “U” bracket; a traditional square design and a design that closely follows the shape of the tear drop glazing.

The “U” bracket options are unaffected by the brim type i.e. any “U” bracket shape can be used with either brim type.“U” brackets are made in steel, galvanised, polyester powder coated in the colour of the lantern and supplied pre-assembled to the lantern.

Wiring is made simple by having a terminal block mounted within the base of the“U” bracket.

Tear Drop U

Tear Drop U

Round U

Square U

Square U

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage Brim Options Glazing Options “U” Bracket Options Zebra Version

A B B•

Strand A Plus 870 900 18.0 0.35m2 Wide Tear Drop

Strand A 643 670 527 11.5 0.19m2 Wide/Narrow Tear Drop/Round Available

Strand B 575 585 484 8.5 0.15m2 Wide/Narrow Tear Drop/Round Square/Tear Drop/Round Available

Strand C 498 480 396 5.5 0.11m2 Wide/Narrow Tear Drop Square/Tear Drop

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage Brim Options Glazing Options “U” Bracket Options Zebra Version

A B B•

Ely A 638 670 527 11.5 0.17m2 Wide/Narrow Tear Drop Available

Ely B 576 585 484 8.5 0.14m2 Wide/Narrow Tear Drop Square/Tear Drop Available

Ely C 489 480 396 5.5 0.10m2 Wide/Narrow Tear Drop Square/Tear Drop

Ely Dimensions

Strand Dimensions


Iffley


ØB

A

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A A• B

320 378 324 4.9 0.09m2

•Straight glazing

Iffley

sho

wn

on T

ubul

ar S

teel

5m

col

umn

with

st

anda

rd S

wan

Nec

k co

lum

n br

acke

t

Iffley

sho

wn

on O

xfor

d 4m

col

umn

with

Iffl

ey S

wan

Nec

k co

lum

n br

acke

t

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m


Example

1. Model

IFF IFF

2. Mounting

E Top Entry Easy-fit™

T Top Entry Threaded T




4. Light Source



100S** 100W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise

035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 70W CDM-T

042P 42W PL-T 042P

045W 45W CosmoPolis

060W 60W CosmoPolis






A 5/35

B 10/10 B

C 31/35

D 5/25


N No Photocell




PD Part Night Dim



Example Code = IFF T E 042P 10 B U

Product CodesIffley

*Not available with dimming or CMS**Supplied with gear tray for remote mountingSuggested column/


Options

Iffley For mounting at 2.5 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W

Mounting: Easy-fit™ entry [42.4mm Ø] Threaded entry [1” BSP]

Glazing: Polycarbonate curved glazing bowl (standard) Polycarbonate straight glazing bowl






Materials












Straight glazing bowl


RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

70

RAL

3005

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25




Madley Park, Witney


Hatfield


ØB

A

ØC

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

1007 585 76 10.5 0.19m2

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m


Product CodesHatfieldExample

1. Model

HAB HAB




3. Light Source




070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 42W PL-T 042P

057P* 57W PL-T

045W 45W CosmoPolis

060W 60W CosmoPolis

090W 90W CosmoPolis






A 5/35

B 10/10

C 31/35 C

D 5/25


N No Photocell




PD Part Night Dim





Example Code = HAB E 042P 10 C C





Options

Hatfield For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: 76mm Ø

Glazing: Polycarbonate glazing cone





Materials


Body: Fabricated aluminium








RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

70

RAL

3005

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25



Heaton Grange, Bolton

Hat

field

sho

wn

on L

arge

Pla

in C

ast w

all b

rack

et

Hat

field

sho

wn

on C

ardi

ff 6m

col

umn


York & Warwick


ØB

A

ØC

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

York 778 323 76 9.4 0.14m2

Warwick 778 345 76 9.4 0.15m2

York

sho

wn

on C

hest

er 4

m c

olum

n

War

wic

k sh

own

on O

rnat

e Ca

st w

all b

rack

et

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m


Product CodesYork & WarwickYork Warwick Example

1. Model

YOK WAR YOK




3. Light Source

050S 050S 50W SON-T/StreetWise



035C* 035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 042P 42W PL-T




140W 140W 140W CosmoPolis 140W




10 10 RAL 9005 Black 10


A A 5/35

B B 10/10

C C 31/35 C

D D 5/25


N N No Photocell





CH CH CMS Harvard LeafNut CH


Example Code = YOK E 140W 10 C CH





York Warwick

Options

York For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Warwick For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: 76mm Ø







Coronet painted gold (Warwick only)

Materials


Coronet: Aluminium


Seals: Neoprene



Base casting has external connector block for ease of installation

Tool-free access to luminaire for ease of maintenance via removable canopy

ØB

A

ØC

WarwickYork


RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

70

RAL

3005

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25




York Luss, Banks of Loch Lomond


Salisbury

Salisbury & Newport


5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m


Newport




Product CodesSalisbury & Newport


Salisbury Newport Example

1. Model

SAL NEW NEW




3. Light Source




035C* 035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 042P 42W PL-T








10 10 RAL 9005 Black 10


A A 5/35

B B 10/10

C C 31/35 C

D D 5/25


N N No Photocell







Example Code = NEW E 060W 10 C C


Options

Salisbury For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Newport For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: 76mm Ø







Materials



Seals: Neoprene





ØB

A

ØC

ØB

AØC

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

Salisbury 778 500 76 9.4 0.16m2

Newport 778 365 76 9.4 0.15m2

NewportSalisbury




RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

70

RAL

3005

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25

Salisbury Linlithgow Street, West Lothian

New

port

sho

wn

on C

ardi

ff 5m

col

umn

with

opt

iona

l lad

der b

ars

Salis

bury

sho

wn

on Y

ork

pede

stal


Brae

mar

sho

wn

on C

hest

er 5

m c

olum

n

Braemar

Braemar & Waterford


ØB

AØC

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

Braemar 652 365 76 9.4 0.14m2

Waterford 652 450 76 9.4 0.15m2

Wat

erfo

rd s

how

n on

Nev

a w

all b

rack

et

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m





Product CodesBraemar & Waterford Braemar Waterford Example

1. Model

BRA WAT WAT




3. Light Source




035C* 035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 042P 42W PL-T







4. Colour– for alternative colours see below

10 10 RAL 9005 Black 10


A A 5/35

B B 10/10

C C 31/35 C

D D 5/25


N N No Photocell







Example Code = WAT E 140W 10 C U


Options

Braemar For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Waterford For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: 76mm Ø

Glazing: Medium clear polycarbonate glazing cone






Materials



Seals: Neoprene





Waterford

WaterfordBraemar

ØB

A

ØC


RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

70

RAL

3005

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25




Braemar Kingsmead, Milton Keynes


Henley


ØB

ØC

A

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

645 314 76 9.4 0.14m2

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m





Product CodesHenleyExample

1. Model

HEN HEN




3. Light Source




035C* 35W CDM-T

070C* 70W CDM-T

150C* 150W CDM-T

042P 42W PL-T


060W 60W CosmoPolis

090W 90W CosmoPolis




4. Colour– for alternative colours see below



A 5/35

B 10/10

C 31/35

D 5/25 D


N No Photocell




PD Part Night Dim



Example Code = HEN E 045W 10 D C


Options

Henley For mounting at 3 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 150W

Mounting: 76mm Ø







Materials



Seals: Neoprene






RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

70

RAL

3005

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25




Royal Clarence Yard, Gosport

Hen

ley

show

n on

Lin

ear w

all b

rack

et

Hen

ley

show

n on

Car

diff

4m c

olum

n w

ith o

ptio

nal l

adde

r bar

s

Reliable, established

performance

Functional 143


Functional

An established range of products offering a practical lighting solution across a breadth of applications. The performance of each is designed to suit its function, whether lighting residential developments, traffic junctions or pedestrian walkways.

Energy efficiency is achieved using photocell switching or electronic controls compatible with most Central Management Systems. Flat glass options and obtrusive light shields prevent unwanted light spill, while options for mounting and on-site adjustment allow flexibility.

Certification to ISO 9001:2008

reflects the integrity of our rigorous quality

management systems

DW400 Cribbs Causeway, Bristol

Meridian148 – 149

DW400146 – 147

Toro150 – 151

Road Lantern144 – 145

Functional144 Functional 145


Road Lantern

Coming SoonFor further information visit

www.dwwindsor.com

• New range of luminaires for road lighting

• Suitable for lamps ranging from 50W to 400W

• Designed to offer great value for money and good performance



DW400IP66 | IK07 | CLASS I

• Robust construction – ideal for residential developments






Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B

Bowl 265 450 9.8 0.09m2

Flat glass 192 450 10.4 0.07m2

Product CodesDW400 Options

DW400 For mounting at 4 – 6 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 100W

Mounting: Direct entry [76mm Ø] Side entry [42mm Ø]

Glazing: Flat toughened glass Polycarbonate bowl



Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green




Materials

Ring/entry: Die cast aluminium








RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005


ØB

A

ØB

A


Example

1. Model

DW4 DW4

2. Mounting

D Direct Entry D

S Side Entry

3. Glazing



4. Control gear – check compatibility with light sources



5. Light Source




035C* 35W CDM-T

070C 70W CDM-T

042P 42W PL-T

057P* 57W PL-T

045W 45W CosmoPolis

060W 60W CosmoPolis

090W 90W CosmoPolis





7. Diamond Optic® setting/LED Array Distribution

A 5/35 A

B 10/10

C 31/35

D 5/25

8. Switching, dimming & control

N No Photocell




PD Part Night Dim





Example Code = DW4 D F E L230 10 A C

5m

4m

3m

2m

6m

1m

Armstrong Road, Maidstone

Flat glass

A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25



DW

400

show

n on

Tap

ered

5m

col

umn

DW

400

show

n on

Tub

ular

Ste

el 6

m c

olum

n


MeridianIP65 | IK08 | CLASS I

• Four sealed optic capsules with independent rotational adjustment facility – allow enhanced fine tuning of optical control


• Flat glass for zero upward light


5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

10m

2m

6m

1m

Product CodesMeridian Options

Meridian For mounting at 8 – 15 metres Maximum lamp wattage: 4 x 250W

Mounting: Post top luminaire to fit 140mm Ø (standard) or 114mm Ø column shaft


Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic gear Miniature photocell (x2) or Nema socket (x2) Compatible with leading Central Management Systems (CMS)


Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 7037 Dusty Grey RAL 5003 Sapphire Blue RAL 6005 Light Moss Green


Materials


Entry: Galvanised steel

Access: Stainless steel screws




Ease of maintenance via four, quarter turn screws

Diamond Optic®

Suggested column optionFor full range of columns see page 256



Example

1. Model

MER MER


E Electronic Gear: certain light sources only

M Magnetic Gear: certain lamp types only M

3. Light Source

150S 4 X 150W SON-T+/CDO-TT 150S

150C* 4 X 150W CDM-T

250C* 4 X 250W CDM-T

250S 4 X 250W SON-T+/CDO-TT

140W 4 X 140W CosmoPolis



5. Diamond Optic® setting

A 5/35 A

B 10/10

C 31/35

D 5/25

6. Switching, dimming & control

N No Photocell N




PD Part Night Dim





Example Code = MER M 150S 10 A N

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

227 1176 127 65 0.25m2

ØB

A

ØC

One Direction Ideal for lighting wide areas from one side: e.g. promenades and car parks

Two Directions Ideal for applications such as dual carriageways by mounting the Meridian in the central reservation

Four Directions Ideal for pedestrianised areas, car parks, large roundabouts, market places and junctions

RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005

Upper Thames Street, London

Two Directions 10/10

Four Directions 10/10

Two Directions 5/35

Four Directions 5/35


The four Diamond Optic® capsules can rotate through 360º to allow the Meridian to be used for a number of different applications This can be carried out during installation to fine-tune the lighting distribution

Mer

idia

n sh

own

on T

ubul

ar S

teel

10m

col

umn


ToroIP66 | IK09 | CLASS II

• Purpose designed for amenity and car park lighting

• Flat glazing for zero upward light

• Tool-less access to lamp and gear module via quarter turn latch

• LED option available on request


5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

2m

6m

1m

Product CodesToro Options

Toro For mounting at 6 – 8 metres

Mounting: Post top luminaire to fit 76mm Ø column shaft

Glazing: Transparent polycarbonate glazing

Gear, switching and control: Electronic or magnetic control gear Miniature photocell

Light source: See product codes LED option available on request

Colours: RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

Optical control: Central area optic

Materials

Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium




Cable termination within base of product via IP66 rated connector

Lamp and gear module complete with isolating terminal block to interrupt power supply on removal

Tool less access via sealed quarter turn latch


Example

1. Model

TRO TRO


E Electronic Gear: certain light sources only E


3. Light Source




035C 35W CDM-T

070C 70W CDM-T

150C 150W CDM-T



4. Colour


5. Control

N No Photocell N



Example Code = TRO E 090W 20 N

Dimensions mm

Weight kg WIndage

A B C

534 780 76 16 0.16m²

Suggested column optionFor full range of columns see page 256

Toro

sho

wn

on ta

pere

d 8m

col

umn

Powered by nature

Solar & Wind 153


Whether wholly embracing energy-saving or choosing a solar or wind product for other practical reasons, DW Windsor has a solution to support your ambitions. Most of our column-mounted, LED luminaires may be used with solar/wind technology to offer the required look and performance.

The system can feed back into the local electrical grid or act as a stand-alone (off-grid) system for remote areas. Using the efficiencies of LED and maximising the use of nature’s power, this system has been designed, analysed and honed over a period of time to offer the greatest cost benefit possible.

Solar & Wind Powered Lighting

Lighting Powered by Nature154 – 155

Stand-Alone & Grid-Connected Systems156 – 157

SOLARENERGY

WINDENERGY

ELECTRICITY GRID

NIG

HT

TIM

E

DAY

TIM

E

This system has been designed,

analysed and honed over time to offer the greatest cost benefit possible

154 Solar & Wind


Solar & Wind 155

Tried and Tested SystemDW Windsor can provide complete systems to suit the needs of individual customers, including all of the elements required in a turn-key solution.

The system has been designed to include:

• LED light source, for its long life and low maintenance characteristics

• Wind turbine, to harness energy from wind

• Photovoltaic panel(s) to harness solar energy

• Power storage using 12V batteries (not required for grid-connected systems)

Our system is designed to use just a single photovoltaic panel, multiple panels or in combination with a wind turbine. When deciding on which to choose there are several considerations to take into account:

Location: depending on the exposure to sunlight or good quality wind.

Time of day the energy can be harnessed and used: the solar panels harvest energy during the hours of sunlight and this is consumed by the luminaire after dark, whereas a wind turbine will potentially generate energy both day and night.

Suitable Lighting ProductsThe DW Windsor’s range of LED lighting products are suitable for use with this technology. In addition, any DW Windsor column bracket may be used to mount the luminaire and customer’s bespoke designs for mounting the photovoltaic panels and luminaire can also be accommodated.

Mon

aro

LED

II

Page

s 54

– 5

5

Solar & Wind Solar & Wind

Lighting Powered by NatureWhilst there are many uncertainties in life, we can be sure that the sun will rise and set each day.

With the sun comes the opportunity to harness some of its power to provide energy through photovoltaic cells to afford lighting without mains power or the carbon associated with it.

DW Windsor has been trialling different technologies for a number of years, but it is only now that the right turbines, photovoltaic cells, batteries and light sources combination have become available to give the performance required to provide a viable, cost-effective solution.

Evor

a LE

D

Page

s 62

– 6

3

DW

400

Page

s 14

6 –

147

Stra

tum

Pa

ges

92 –

93

Exce

l Pa

ges

94 –

95

Dov

er

Page

s 96

– 9

7

Pola

r Pa

ges

98 –

99


Solar & Wind 157156 Solar & Wind

Stand-Alone SystemThis type of system is self-contained and does not require connection to a supply of electricity. It contains a means of harvesting natural, renewable energy (either photo-voltaic cells alone or as a combination of cells and a wind turbine), batteries to store this energy until it’s required, a luminaire, a column and brackets on which the cells/turbine and luminaire are mounted and the necessary controls to operate the system.

Advantages• Self-contained: no mains electricity supply required (negating

the need for expensive channelling of cables in inaccessible or remote places to connect to the electricity grid)

• No connection charges

• No future electricity costs and independence from future energy cost increases

• Produces no carbon emissions

• Inexhaustible energy supply

ConsiderationsThe amount of energy captured is dependent on sunlight so short winter days with poor quality of sunlight may not generate the amount of energy required to power the lighting for the required duration. To overcome this potential problem an option has been devised combining energy from the sun and wind.

Wind turbines can be very effective energy generators in the appropriate location, however not all locations are suitable (e.g. amongst buildings).

Energy is stored in batteries which will need to be replaced periodically. The batteries need a suitable place in which to be stored, which could either be in the column base or housed separately in a feeder pillar.

Grid-Connected SystemThis type of system is connected to the electricity grid and is less complex than a stand-alone system. It also harvests solar or solar and wind energy but rather than storing this energy in batteries it feeds-in to the electricity grid and revenue is generated from this. When darkness falls, the lights will come on in the same way a conventionally powered street light does and the energy for this comes from the electricity grid.

Advantages• Guaranteed supply of electricity whenever required,

irrespective of the weather

• Can generate income for the user by way of feed-in tariff incentives

• Generates considerably more electricity than it consumes for most of the year

• Inexhaustible energy supply

• No batteries to house or replace

ConsiderationsAn electrical grid connection is required so this arrangement cannot be located in areas the grid doesn’t cover.

Feed-in tariffs are likely to alter over the life-time of the installation which could affect pay-back calculations.

The DW Windsor Solar & Wind system can be used as:

• Stand-alone system

• Grid-connected system

Each has its own benefits and considerations which will need to be assessed depending on the needs of different customers and the circumstances under which the technology is to be used.

Stand-Alone System Grid-Connected System

Solar & Wind Systems

Solar & Wind Systems

For advice and guidance or to discuss particular requirements please contact [email protected]

Wind Energy Wind EnergySolar Energy

Solar Energy

DC Energy Provides Power To The Luminaire

Controls & Batteries Housed In Base

Electricity Grid

Day

Tim

e

Nig

ht T

ime

Architectural 159

Defining landscape features

A variety of options are available to highlight architectural and landscaping features. From subtle colour washing and defining paths or building outlines, to punching light up columns and floodlighting façades, this range offers a solution for lighting all urban landscapes.

LED and lamped versions are available, allowing powerful and colour changing possibilities with DMX control. The ranges offer useful floodlighting for washing linear surfaces or focused spots of light, controlled by beam angles or asymmetric reflectors. Stainless steel or aluminium bezels offer a choice of looks to suit all environments.

For help in lighting different situations see our ‘How-to Guides’ section, page 292.

Architectural

Portea LED172 – 173

Renza LED174 – 175

Anello LED166 – 167

Vaio LED160 – 165

Light Point168 – 171

Luca196 – 197

Monza192 – 193

Lyra188 – 189

Malo LED194 – 195

Mano LED190 – 191

Vertica LED204 – 205

Reno198 – 199

Vertica206 – 207

Kona202 – 203

Pharola-Wall200 – 201

Tatra210 – 211

Aventis212 – 213

Petra176 – 177

Capra-Mini178 – 181

Capra-Compact178 – 185

Cassia LED186 – 187

Capra178 – 183

Vaio LED Wimbledon

Colour wash, define outlines,

illuminate columns or floodlight

building façades



Architectural 161

Highlighting linear features or making modular patterns in paving, accentuating structures and marking the way for pedestrians are all achievable with Vaio LED. In addition, any RGB colour can be added, with sequencing if required, to give a truly bespoke look to any urban landscape.

Individual modules can be simply aligned to give continuous runs of light. A DMX controller programs the individually addressable modules for accentuated effect. Advice and help with design and on-site programming and installation is offered to ensure the scheme fulfils all specification requirements.

Available in a range of colours including RGB

Features• Linear LED light

• Minimal daytime appearance

• Available in five different lengths

• Full range of RGB or monochrome colours

• Full advice service

Vaio LEDIP67 | IK10 | CLASS IIIVaio LED

Linear illumination

Market Street, Rotherham


Architectural 163162 Architectural

Vaio LED Wimbledon



Options

Mono Colour Available in 250/500/750/1000/ 1250mm lengths

• Warm White – 2500K• Neutral White – 4600K• Cool White – 7000K• Red• Blue• Amber• Green

RGB Available in 500/1000mm lengths

DMX controlled colour changing with individually addressable on board LED drivers

Mounting

The following options are available to order in multiples of 250mm up to a maximum of 2500mm

Option 1 – VAI-SS-F-XXXX Galvanised steel section

• Suitable for an in-ground “frameless” look

• Various mounting heights for different paving depths

Option 2 – VAI-AL-F-XXXX Aluminium frame section

• More suitable for DMX Vaio system

• Dedicated cable channel beneath Vaio for easy wiring and access

Option 3 – VAI-DR-F-XXXX ACO drainage section

• Mounts directly on top of standard ACO drainage sections

• Allows combination of lighting and drainage applications

Note – Replace XXXX with length required

Wattages

Mono Colour 7.5W per metre RGB 15W per metre

Other

Full technical support available on request

Vaio design guide available online

DMX Controllers

To allow colour changing sequences, a DMX controller is required to provide the signal to each Vaio

Option 1 – DMX-CS-001 Standalone Controller

• Basic pre-programmable DMX controller

• Allows user edited colour changing sequences, inputted via laptop interface and programming software

• Capable of running one single pre-set sequence at any one time

Option 2 – DMX-CS-003 Interactive Controller

• Programmable via LCD screen and scroll wheel user control

• Can be pre-set to allow various sequences to operate on a calendar basis

• Allows modules to be addressed individually to allow a wide range of lighting effects

Extension Cables and Cable Termination

Extension cables are required for use between each Vaio within a circuit and are available in standard lengths. The last Vaio on each circuit will require a cable termination plug

Mono 1 Metre – VAI-EL-01M 2 Metre – VAI-EL-02M 3 Metre – VAI-EL-03M 5 Metre – VAI-EL-05M 10 Metre – VAI-EL-10M

IP68 End Cap – VAI-ECC-M8

RGB 3 Metre – VAI-EL-03M-RGB DMX 120Ω Resistor – VAI-DMX-RESIST (Required for last RGB driver in each circuit) IP68 Cable Termination Plug– VAI-ECC-M8


Continuous lit effect can be achieved by removing supplied end caps

Easy to use IP68 plug and socket connector system

Vaio LED simply snaps into a ‘U’ Section mounting extrusion for quick & easy installation

Vaio LEDIP67 | IK10 | CLASS III

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C

250/500•/750 1000•/1250

30 40 1.7kg (max)

Vaio LED

C

A B

Mono Colour RGB Example

1. Model

VAI VAI VAI

2. Light Source

WW Warm White LED 2500K

NW Neutral White 4600K

CW Cool White LED 7000K

B Blue LED

A Amber LED

R Red LED

G Green LED

RGB RGB RGB

3. Size

250 250mm

500 500 500mm

750 750mm

1000 1000 1000mm 1000

1250 1250mm

Example Code = VAI RGB 1000

Product Codes

• Linear LED light for defining or highlighting architecture

• Available in five different lengths for individual or continuous lines of light

• Choice of RGB or monochrome, including white, blue and red

• DMX controlled colour changing option with individually addressable modules

Technical Data

Can withstand the load of: 15000kg vehicle travelling at 18mph Unite Building, Liverpool

Power Supply Enclosures

A range of power supply enclosures are available designed specifically to work with the Vaio LED system. Each is supplied in an IP66 enclosure complete with power supply and wiring ready for installation.

Cabling Options

Power supply to Mono Colour Vaio

The following cables have been sized for usage with the power supply enclosures to supply a maximum of 10m of Mono Vaio per circuit.

Power supply to RGB Vaio

The following cables have been sized for usage with the power supply enclosures to supply a maximum of 5m of RGB Vaio per circuit.

Cables are combined power and DMX signal in order to limit the number of cables required within the scheme.

Mono Colour Vaio RGB Vaio

VAI-75W-ENC75W Power Supply

10m max Vaio1 circuit








<30m to first Vaio >30m to first Vaio

1 outgoing way VAI-PSC-MON-251-XX2.5mm2 Cable

VAI-PSC-MON-401-XX4.0mm2 Cable

2 outgoing ways VAI-PSC-MON-252-XX2.5mm2 Cable

VAI-PSC-MON-402-XX4.0mm2 Cable

<30m to first Vaio >30m to first Vaio

1 outgoing way VAI-PSC-RGB-251-XX2.5mm2 Cable

VAI-PSC-RGB-401-XX4.0mm2 Cable

Note – Power cables are available in multiples of 5m lengths, replace XX with required length

Note – Power cables are available in multiples of 5m lengths, replace XX with required length •RGB 500 & 1000mm lengths only



Anello LEDIP67 | IK10 | CLASS III

Anello LED

D

C

ØA

ØB

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C D

220 152 100 53 2.5 Royal Terrace Gardens, TorquayRoyal Terrace Gardens, Torquay

Example

1. Model

ANE ANE

2. Size

220 220mm outer diameter 220

3. Light Source

W White LED W

B Blue LED

Example Code = ANE 220 W

Product Codes

• Circular ring, in-ground LED feature light

• Ideal for creating interesting patterns on pathways

• For flush mounting into paved areas or walls

Options

Anello LED 220mm diameter

Glazing: Toughened glass

Light source: LED Array

Colours: White Blue Other colours available on request

Power supply: Requires 24V power supply

Materials

Body: UV resistant nylon

Glazing: Opaque toughened glass

Sump: Galvanised Steel


Product comes with 25cm prewired flexible cable and M12 metal gland

Supplied with galvanised steel sub-frame

Technical Data

Walkover only

Maximum static load of 1500kg

It is necessary to provide a gravel sump approximately 25cm deep to ensure good drainage and to avoid water stagnation

Must not be installed in a recess




OptionsLight Point

Glazing: Integral opaque non-slip surface

Light source: White LED Blue LED RGB

MaterialsBody/Glazing: Structural Polyurethane

Cable: Abrasion resistant flexible cable

Lead OptionsOption 1 – Single lead connection for Mono Colour Light Point

Option 2 – Twin lead connection for Mono Colour and RGB Light Point

Power SuppliesMono Colour Light Point: 15W IP66 Power Supply Dimensions – 130 x 130 x 75mm ILPPS002

RGB Light Point: 85W IP66 Power Supply Dimensions – 54 x 180 x 90mm ILPPSRGB

RGB Control: IP20 RGB sequencer Dimensions – 80 x 80 x 50mm ILPSERGB

Extension Cables A range of extension cables are available

Product Code

Length Mono Colour RGB

1m ILPP1001 ILPP1RGB



To ensure plug and socket connections are permanently secured, a lead connector clamp should be used at every connection Lead Connector Clamp – ILPSS001

MountingWhilst the Light Point can be mounted directly into a paved area as standard, a range of ground sockets have been designed for ease of installation and future maintenance.

Option 1 – A plain ground socket without bezel is available for setting into concrete or where the depth of the paved area in which Light Point is being installed is shallow. Plain Ground Socket – ILPGS001

Option 2 – For situations where a clean edged hole may be difficult to cut, a stainless steel ground socket with 5mm bezel is available. Ground Socket with Bezel – ILPGS002


Easy to use tool-less IP68 plug and socket connector system

Light PointIP67 | IK09 | CLASS III

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B

62 60 0.2

Light Point

St. Martin's Quarter, Worcester

Mono Colour RGB Example

1. Model

ILP ILP ILP

2. Light Source

W White LED W

B Blue LED

RGB RGB

3. Number of Leads

001 Single Lead 001

002 002 Twin Leads

Example Code = ILP W 001

Product Codes

Can withstand the load of a 20000kg vehicle travelling at 30mph

• Marker LED light for flush-mounting into paved areas, walls or steps

• Choice of RGB or Mono Colour white or blue

• Gives rimless, even illumination across the opaque lens

• Durable, drive-over construction, with non-slip surface

To install the Light Point, a 60mmØ hole cut into the paved area is required. Sufficient drainage should be provided below the Light Point to avoid water stagnation

Technical Data

Monochrome Light Point Average power consumption 0.6W Up to 18 Light Point per power supply Up to 30m between power supply and furthest Light Point Light Points may be reduced in brightness by 50% via a switch in the power supply

RGB Light Point Pre-set colour change sequencing available (x2) in a choice of 3 speeds each Light Points can change individually (max 16) or together (max 24) Up to 80m between power supply and furthest Light Point May be DMX controlled To operate up to 16 RGB Light Points 1 x ILPPSRGB, 1 x ILPSERGB and up to 16 x ILPRGB are required To increase spacing between RGB Light Points, RGB extension leads are required



Light Point & Lyra St. Martin's Quarter, Worcester



Options

High power uplight (1 LED) Uplight (9 LEDs) Single window (3 LEDs) Triple window (9 LEDs)

Glazing: Polycarbonate (Single & Triple window) Toughened glass with prismatic diffuser (Uplight)

Light source: White LEDs Blue LEDs Red LEDs Amber LEDs RGB LEDs available on request

Colour: RAL 9006 Aluminium

Materials

Body: Technopolymer

Bezel: Corrosion protected die cast aluminium

Sump: Technopolymer



Access via Allen screws

Cable entry via two PG9 gland for Ø4 – 8mm round cable

Supplied with an IP68 gel filled connector with loop in/loop out capability for flexible cables

Optional accessories

15W 700mA constant current electronic driver (4 luminaires max – High Power Uplight only)

DRI CC 15W700MA-GT (on tray) DRI CC 15W700MA-RD (in IP67 ground box)

10W 24V constant voltage electronic driver 6 luminaires max: 9 LED variant 18 luminaires max: 3 LED variant DRI CV 10W24V-GT

40W 24V constant voltage electronic driver 24 luminaires max: 9 LED variant 60 luminaires max: 3 LED variant DRI CV 40W24V-GT

10W 24V constant voltage electronic driver with IP67 ground recessed box 6 luminaires max: 9 LED variant 18 luminaires max: 3 LED variant DRI CV 10W24V-RD

40W 24V constant voltage electronic driver with IP67 ground recessed box 24 luminaires max: 9 LED variant 60 luminaires max: 3 LED variant DRI CV 40W24V-RD

Portea LEDIP67 | IK07 | CLASS III

Portea LED

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A• B C D

Window 157 108 125 140 0.51

Uplight 157 88 125 140 0.51

•includes ground box

High power uplight Single window Triple window

Example

1. Model

PLD PLD PLD

2. Style

N High Power Uplight

U Uplight

S Single Window

T Triple Window T

3. Light Source

W W White LED W

B B Blue LED

R Red LED

A Amber LED

Example Code = PLD T W

Product Codes

• Decorative in-ground LED light

• Single or triple window or uplighter versions

• Choice of monochrome LEDs: white, blue, red and amber

• High Power Uplight (3.2W) in narrow or wide beam

• RGB version also available to order

Glass Temperature

Max – All versions 35°


High power uplight

6°Narrow beam Aspen Court, Cottisford, Northants

Can withstand a load of: 7500kg vehicle travelling at 18mph 2000kg static

Technical Data

High power uplight

Current: 700mA Power: 3.2W

Average luminous flux 65 lumens (white) 14 lumens (blue)

The High Power Portea requires a constant current driver

All other Portea variants require a constant voltage driver



Uplight



Renza LEDIP67 | IK10 | CLASS I

Renza LED

Single window Double window Four window

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C D

113 180 160 33 1.4

Example

1. Model

REN REN

2. Style

1 Single Window

2 Double Window 2

4 Four Window

3. Light Source

WW Warm White 3000K WW

NW Neutral White 4000K

CW Cool White 6000K

4. Colour

10 RAL 9005 Black

26 RAL 9006 Aluminium


Example Code = REN 2 WW 20

Product Codes

• LED Window marker light, offers different lit effects for pedestrian or trafficked areas

• Three window apertures options

• Available in a choice of white LEDs

Options

Single window Double window Four window

Glazing: Internally structured toughened glass

Light source: Warm White 3000K Neutral White 4000K Cool White 6000K

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

Optical control: 1, 2 or 4 x 1W LED Internal prismatic lens

Materials



Sump: Nylon





Driver is integral to the luminaire

Comes complete with M16 plastic cable gland and 25cm of cable pre-wired



IP68 in ground junction box for steel wire armour cable terminations IPJBSWA01


Single window

Double window

Four window


Technical Data





Options

Single window Double window

Glazing: Curved etched toughened glass

Light source: 35W CDM-T 18, 26W PL-C

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

Materials



Sump: Nylon









PetraIP67 | IK10 | CLASS I

Petra

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C D

225 260 150 215 3.8

Single window Double window

ØC

ØA

D

B

Example

1. Model

PET PET

2. Style

S Single Window S

D Double Window

3. Light Source

035C 35W CDM-T 035C

018P 18W PL-C

026P 26W PL-C

4. Colour



20 RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

Example Code = PET S 035C 10

Product Codes

• Performance windowed light, for defining the borders of paths or trafficked areas

• Choice of single or double apertures

• Convex etched glass gives diffuse lit effect

Bengeworth School, Evesham

Plan view

Plan view


Technical Data



Single window

Double window



Architectural 179

The Capra range of in-ground up-lighters allows a wide range of effects to be achieved from the glow of a marker light to floodlighting a building façade or highlighting architectural features. Capra’s breadth encompasses three different versions: Capra-Mini, for low level lighting; Capra and Capra-Compact for more impactful up-lighting. Capra-Compact allows equivalent outputs to Capra, for where the installation depth is limited.

A choice of light sources, including performance LEDs, combined with an array of beam distributions, gives total design freedom. Static or adjustable reflectors and beam focussing offers additional flexibility, for on-site fine-tuning for maximum impact.

Capra range available with LED and conventional light sources

Features• Choice of light sources including LED

• Asymmetric and symmetric distributions

• Fixed and adjustable reflectors

• Small, large and compact versions

• Stainless steel or painted bezel options

Capra RangeCapra Range

Enhance visual characteristics




Capra-MiniIP67 | IK09 | CLASS II

Capra-Mini

AsymmetricCompact FluorescentMetal Halide

• Mini version of Capra for lighting small features or way marking

• Available in LED, metal halide and compact fluorescent

• Choice of white LED colour temperatures

• Adjustable optic for accurate focussing

Example

1. Model

CPM CPM CPM CPM

2. Light Source

020C 20W CDM-TM

010P 10W PL-C


CW Cool White LED 6000K CW

3. Optical Control

N N Narrow Beam – 6° N

E Elliptical Beam – 50 x 10°

W Wide Beam – 115°

A Asymmetric Beam

4. Colour

7 7 7 Stainless Steel

AX AX AX RAL 7039 Quartz Grey AX

Example Code = CPM CW N AX

Product Codes

LED

Options

Metal Halide Maximum lamp wattage – 20W

Compact Fluorescent Maximum lamp wattage – 10W

Asymmetric Maximum lamp wattage – 20W

LED Maximum wattage – 6.6W

Glazing: Clear toughened glass Frosted toughened glass available on request

Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear as standard – Lamped version Complete with mains voltage power supply – LED version

Light source: 20W CDM-T 10W PL-T 6 x 1.1W LED

Colours: RAL 7039 Quartz Grey Grade 316 Stainless Steel

Optical control: Narrow beam Elliptical beam Wide beam Asymmetric reflector

Materials

Body: Techno Polymer

Bezel: Painted aluminium or stainless steel bezel

Sump: Techno Polymer

Seals: Anti-ageing silicone gasket







Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B

All Versions 190 275 2.8100º beam Imax 8º

±7º Adjustable

Glass Temperature

20W CDM-TM 80°

Compact Fluorescent 52°

6 LED 40°


ØA

C

B

Capra Bentley Showroom, Leicester

Technical Data



Narrow beam 20W CDM-TM

Narrow beam LED

Elliptical beam LED

Wide beam 10W PL-C

Asymmetric reflector 20W CDM-TM


±7º Adjustable 6º beam

±7º Adjustable 10º beam

±7º Adjustable 50º x 10º Elliptical beam

115º beam



Options

Capra 1 – Metal Halide Maximum lamp wattage: 70W

Capra 2 – Compact Fluorescent Maximum lamp wattage: 42W

Capra 3 – Asymmetric Maximum lamp wattage: 70W

Glazing: Clear toughened glass

Frosted toughened glass available on request

Gear, switching and control: Magnetic gear Electronic control gear available on request

Light source: 35, 70W CDM-T 18W PL-C 42W PL-T

Colours: RAL 7039 Quartz Grey Grade 316 Stainless Steel

Optical control: Narrow beam Medium beam Wide beam Asymmetric reflector

Materials

Body: Extruded aluminium


Sump: PVC




Comes complete with PG16 plastic cable gland and 25cm of cable pre-wired




CapraIP67 | IK10 | CLASS II

Capra

C

B

ØA

• In-ground up-light for low level marker or high powered accent lighting

• Range of beam distributions and adjustable optics, allowing on-site focussing

• Available in metal halide or compact fluorescent versions

• Choice of stainless steel or painted aluminium bezels


Capra 1 Capra 2 Capra 3 Example

1. Model

CA1 CA2 CA3 CA1

2. Light Source

035C 35W CDM-T 035C

070C 70W CDM-T

018P 18W PL-C

042P 42W PL-T

070TD 70W HQI-TS

3. Optical Control

N Narrow Beam – 6°

M Medium Beam – 50° x 10° M

W W Wide Beam – 115°

A Asymmetric Beam

4. Colour

7 7 7 Stainless Steel 7

AX AX AX RAL 7039 Quartz Grey

Example Code = CA1 035C M 7

Product Codes

Glass Temperature

35W CDM-T 83°

70W CDM-T 106°

18W PL-C 51°

42W PL-T 87°

70W HQI-TS 107°Imax 30° Wide beam 70°

Adjustable optic ±10°

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C

All Versions 270 354 250 7.7 (max)

Capra 1Metal Halide

Capra 2Compact Fluorescent

Capra 3Asymmetric


Technical Data



Capra 1 – Metal halide 35W, 70W CDM-T

Capra 2 – Compact fluorescent 18W PL-C, 42W PL-T

Capra 3 – Asymmetric 70W HQI-TS


Adjustable optic ±10° Narrow beam 10°

Adjustable optic ±10° Medium beam 30°

Adjustable optic ±10° Wide beam 50°

Fixed lamp position Wide beam 115°




Capra-CompactIP67 | IK10 | CLASS I

Capra-Compact

• Compact version of the Capra range, suitable for installations with confined depth

• Available in LED and Metal Halide

• Choice of white LED colour temperatures

• Wide range of beam angles, adjustable optic or asymmetric distributions

Example

1. Model

CPC CPC CPC CPC

2. Light Source

035C 35W CDM-T 035C

070C 70W CDM-T

070TD 70W HQI-TS



3. Optical Control

N N Narrow Beam – 10°

M M Medium Beam – 30° M

W Wide Beam – 50° x 10°

A Asymmetric Beam

4. Colour

7 7 7 Stainless Steel 7

AX AX AX RAL 7039 Quartz Grey

Example Code = CPC 035C M 7


Metal Halide Maximum lamp wattage: 70W

LED Maximum wattage: 16.5W


Frosted toughened glass available on request

Light source: 35W CDM-T 70W CDM-T 70W HQI-TS

LED: 15 x 1.1W Warm White 3000K Cool White 6000K

Colours: RAL 7039 Quartz Grey Grade 316 Stainless Steel Bezel

Optical Control: Narrow beam Medium beam Elliptical beam Asymmetric reflector

Materials

Body: Die cast aluminium


Sump: Techno polymer




Product can be loop in/out cabled (using flexible cable) directly into an IP68 rated gear housing, located in the sump

Supplied with mains voltage power supply





Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C D E F

274 114 165 346 500 661 11.7 max

Glass Temperature

LED 45°

35W CDM-T 80°

70W HQI-TS 119°

Shallow, 165mm installation depth

70° Beam Imax 30°


Compact sump allows shallow installation

ØA

F

ED

C

B

ØA

F

ED

C

B

Capra City of Sunderland College & St. Peter's Sixth Form

Technical Data



Narrow beam 35W, 70W CDM-T

Narrow beam LED

Medium beam 35W, 70W CDM-T

Elliptical beam LED

Asymmetric reflector HQI-TS


10° Beam

10°Beam


30° Beam

50º x 10º Beam




Cassia LED

A

C

ØB

• Circular in-ground LED feature up-lighting

• Choice of narrow, medium or wide beam distributions

• Durable construction to withstand vehicular traffic

• Robust stainless steel body ideal for harsh environments

Glass Temperature


Options

Version 1 130mm Ø – 3 x 1W LEDs

Version 2 220mm Ø – 7 x 1W LEDs


Gear, switching and control: 24V Power supply required for 130mm Ø

Complete with mains voltage driver for 220mm Ø


Colour: Stainless Steel

Optical control: Narrow beam Medium beam Wide beam Adjustable reflector (220mmØ)

Materials

Body: Stainless steel

Bezel: Stainless steel

Sump: Nylon





Product is supplied with 25cm of cable to allow easy installation


20W 24V constant voltage electronic driver with IP67 ground recessed box (6 luminaires max) DRI CV 40W24V-RD



Product Codes

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C

1 130 88 120 1

2 220 185 150 3Adjustable optic ±10°Medium beam 35°

Cassia LEDIP67 | IK09 | CLASS I | CLASS II

220mm Version 130mm Version

Version 1 Version 2 Example

1. Model

CAS CAS CAS

2. Light Source

3 3 LEDs – 130mmØ

7 7 LEDs – 220mmØ 7

3. Optical Control

NB NB Narrow Beam – 10° NB

MB Medium Beam – 35°

WB Wide Beam – 50°

4. LED Type

WW WW Warm White 3000K

NW NW Neutral White 4000K NW

CW CW Cool White 6000K

Example Code = CAS 7 NB NW

Version 2220mmØ

Technical Data



Version 1 – 130mm Ø

Version 2 – 220mm Ø

Narrow beam 10°

Wide beam 50°

Adjustable optic ±10°Narrow beam 10°



LyraIP67 | IK10 | CLASS I

Lyra

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C

1 320 302 400 11.3

2 219 220 270 3.5 Orchard Theatre, Dartford

• In-ground up-light for wall-washing or highlighting trees

• Choice of symmetric, asymmetric or adjustable optics

• Robust stainless steel bezel for improved daytime appearance


Lyra 1Glass Temperature

35W CDM-T 105°

70W CDM-T 115°

18W PL-C 50°

26W PL-C 62°

Lyra 1 Symmetric & asymmetric

Lyra 1 Adjustable Example

1. Model

LYR1 LYR1 LYR1

2. Optical Control

S Symmetric S

A Asymmetric

V Adjustable

3. Colour

070HD 70W HQI-TS 070C

070C 70W CDM-T

Example Code = LYR1 S 070C

Lyra 2 Symmetric Lyra 2 Asymmetric Example

1. Model

LYR2 LYR2 LYR2

2. Optical Control

S Symmetric S

A Asymmetric

3. Light Source

035C 035C 35W CDM-T 035C

018P 18W PL-C

026P 26W PL-C

Example Code = LYR2 S 035C


Lyra 1 Maximum lamp wattage: 70W

Lyra 2 Maximum lamp wattage: 35W


Light source: 70W HQI-TS 35, 70W CDM-T 18, 26W PL-C

Colour: Stainless Steel Bezel

Optical control: Symmetric reflector Asymmetric reflector Adjustable reflector (+/-15°)

Materials



Sump: Nylon




Comes complete with two M20 plastic cable glands and 25cm of cable pre-wired




Symmetric optic Asymmetric optic

A

C

ØB

Lyra 2


Technical Data

Can withstand the load of: 2500kg vehicle travelling at 12mph


Lyra 1

Lyra 2


Symmetric optic Adjustable optic ±15°Asymmetric optic



Mano LEDIP67 | IK09 | CLASS I

Mano LED

AC

B

D

• Performance, in-ground LED light, ideal for lighting walls or columns

• Choice of square or circular versions with stainless steel bezel

• Durable construction to withstand light vehicular traffic

Options

Circular version 310mm Ø 117mm in depth

Square version 310mm 117mm in depth


Gear, switching and control: Complete with mains voltage power supply

Dimmable versions available upon request



Optical control: Narrow beam Medium beam

Materials



Sump: Nylon




Product comes with 25cm prewired flexible cable and M20 plastic cable gland

LED Driver is integral to the luminaire


Optional Accessories


Product Codes

Example

1. Model

MAN MAN

2. Style

C Circular Version C

S Square Version

3. Optical Control

N Narrow Beam – 10° N

M Medium Beam – 30°

4. Light Source

WW Warm White 3000K

NW Neutral White 4000K NW

CW Cool White 6000K

Example Code = MAN C N NW

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C D

Circular 117 310 120 405 5.0

Square 117 310 120 405 5.2

Glass Temperature


Narrow beam 10°

Medium beam 30°


Technical Data



Both versions




MonzaIP67 | IK10 | CLASS II

Monza

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B

305 255 8.0

Without frame

• In-ground up-light for washing light up vertical architectural features

• Choice of narrow or medium beam

• User adjustable narrow beam reflector allows 0 to -10° adjustment for accurate focusing

• Available frameless for mounting flush with the ground or with marine grade stainless steel frame


Luton Hoo Hotel, Bedfordshire

Glass Temperature

42W PL-T 55°

70W SON-T+/CDO-TT 70°

70W CDM-TD/SON-TD 80°

35W CDM-T 64°

70W CDM-T 110°

Options

Monza with frame For surface mounting Maximum lamp wattage: 70W

Monza without frame For flush mounting Maximum lamp wattage: 70W

Glazing: Toughened glass Low temperature glass fitted as standard to all version except 42W PL-T option

Light source: 70W SON-T+, CDO-TT 70W CDM-TD, SON-TD 35W CDM-T 70W CDM-T 42W PL-T


Optical control: Asymmetric wide beam

Narrow beam with adjustable reflector

Materials

Body: Technopolymer

Bezel: Grade 316 Stainless Steel

Sump: Technopolymer




Cable Entry via two M20 glands for Ø10 – 14mm round cable




Medium beam 60° Imax 10°

Asymmetric Narrow beam Example

1. Model

MON MON MON

2. Light Source

070S 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT 070S

070T 70W CDM-TD / SON-TD

035C 35W CDM-T

070C 70W CDM-T

042P 42W PL-T

2. Frame

F F With glazing frame

N N Without glazing frame N

3. Reflector

A Asymmetric A


Example Code = MON 070S N A

Product Codes


Technical Data



Asymmetric reflector 42W PL-T 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT 70W CDM-TD/SON-TD

Narrow beam reflector 35, 70W CDM-T


Adjustable optic +10º – 0º

Narrow beam 15°



Malo LEDIP67 | IK09 | CLASS II

Malo LED

B

D

E

C A

• Linear LED in-ground light, for wall washing in pedestrian areas

• Two lengths available, each offering narrow or medium beam angles for different lit effects

• Fixed symmetric or asymmetric distribution

• Available in a choice of white LEDs

Example

1. Model

MAL MAL

2. No of LEDs

12 12 (645mm)

24 24 (1245mm) 24

3. Optical Control

N Narrow Beam – 10° N

M Medium Beam – 30°

4. LED Type

WW Warm White 3000K

NW Neutral White 4000K NW

CW Cool White 6000K

Example Code = MAL 24 N NW


Version 1 645mm – 12 LED

Version 2 1245mm – 24 LED



Light source: LED: 12 or 24 x 1W Warm White 3000K Neutral White 4000K Cool White 6000K

Colours: RAL 9006 Aluminium

Optical control: Adjustable symmetric distribution

Materials


Bezel: Aluminium

Sump: Nylon




Cable entry via PG13.5 gland for Ø9 – 12mm round cable

Supplied with two cable glands to allow loop-in, loop-out wiring

Glass Temperature

All versions 45°

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C D E

1 79 645 95 835 95 3.9

2 79 1245 95 1435 95 6.9


Version 1 – 645mm

Version 2 – 1245mm





Technical Data

Walkover only: Maximum static load of 1500kg





Options

Luca Maximum lamp wattage: 24W


Gear, Switching and Control: Electronic gear

Light source: 14W T5 High efficiency 28W T5 High output

Colours: RAL 9006 Aluminium Grade 316 Stainless Steel

Optical control: Asymmetric reflector Symmetric reflector

Materials

Body: Technopolymer

Frame: Die cast aluminium or stainless steel 316

Sump: Technopolymer




Cable entry via PG13 gland for Ø9 – 12mm round cable




Joining accessories: Aluminium: LUC-JA-26 Stainless Steel: LUC-JA-07

LucaIP67 | IK09 | CLASS II

Luca

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C D

670 630 150 130 4.5 Luton Hoo Hotel, Bedfordshire

• Linear fluorescent up-light for subtle wall washing

• For individual use or creating continuous lines of light for walk or drive over applications

• Choice of asymmetric or symmetric distribution

• Symmetrical version provides non-slip glazing and low surface temperature, making it ideal for pedestrian areas


Example

1. Model

LUC LUC

2. Optical Control

A Asymmetric A

S Symmetric

3. Light Source

014T 14W T5 HE 014T

024T 24W T5 HO

4. Colour

26 RAL 9006 Aluminium 26

7 Stainless Steel

Example Code = LUC A 014T 26

Product Codes

Glass Temperature

All versions 47°



Symmetric Asymmetric


Technical Data

Up to five Luca with the aluminium frame, or ten with the stainless steel frame, can be installed in a continuous line by using the Joining Accessory. This number is restricted only by the effects of thermal expansion outdoors. In an interior application, up to 50 can be joined together over a distance of 200m. Due to electrical limitations the following is a guide to the maximum number of products per circuit:

Up to 90 14W Luca may be connected over a distance of 75m

Up to 70 24W Luca may be connected over a distance of 60m




RenoIP66 | IK07 | CLASS II

Reno

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C

700, 1000, 1300 & 1600 90 105 4.9 (max)

Example

1. Model

REN REN

2. Light Source

014T 14W T5 HE 014T

021T 21W T5 HO

028T 28W T5 HE

035T 35W T5 HE

024T 24W T5 HO

039T 39W T5 HO

049T 49W T5 HO

054T 54W T5 HO

080T 80W T5 HO

Example Code = REN 014T

Product Codes

• Surface mounted linear fluorescent luminaire

• Wide range of T5 lamps from 14W – 80W

• Reflector adjusts on-site to narrow or wide beam distribution

• Adjustable wall or ceiling mounting brackets allow adjustment of light through an arc of 240º

Salonika Church, St. Dimitar, Veliko Tarnovo, Bulgaria

Options

Reno Maximum lamp wattage: 80W


Gear, Switching and Control: Electronic gear

Light source: 14, 21, 28, 35W T5 High efficiency 24, 39, 49, 54, 80W T5 High output

Mounting: Bracket mounted

Colour: Anodised/RAL 9006 Aluminium

Optical control: Two position reflector allows for narrow (62 – 64º) or wide (70 – 78º) distributions

Materials

Body: Anodised extruded aluminium with die cast aluminium ends finished RAL 9006 Aluminium

Brackets: Die cast aluminium finished RAL 9006 Aluminium



Access via quick release latches

Cable entry via two M18 glands for Ø8 – 10.5mm round cable

Supplied with two cable glands to allow loop-in, loop-out wiring

Supplied with a pair of cast aluminium supports which provide adjustment of ±12º either side of vertical

May be wall mounted on adjustable brackets, which are available as 100mm or 300mm projection. Reno can be tilted on these brackets to any setting on an arc of 240º for the 100mm bracket or 260º for the 300mm bracket. This allows the Reno to be directed at the wall to illuminate signage, the mounting surface etc

A number of Reno can be connected over a maximum distance of 60m from the mains supply to the final product


Adjustable wall brackets 100mm RNO-WBA-100

Adjustable wall brackets 300mm RNO-WBA-300


Side view End view



Pharola-WallIP65 | IK10 | CLASS I

Example

1. Model

PHW PHW

2. Height

A Angled A

F Flat

3. Colour

DB DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey DB

4. Back Shield

B With 180°back shield B

N Without 180°back shield

Example Code = PHW A DB B

Product Codes

• Wall mounted luminaire using high efficiency, side emitting LEDs

• Angled or flat mounted versions

• Consistent scheme design can be achieved using Pharola bollards (see pages 228 – 229)

Pharola-Wall Options

Angled

Flat

Glazing: Diffused Acrylic

Gear, switching and control: Integral LED driver

Light source: LED Neutral White – 4100K

Colour: DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9005 Textured Black RAL 9016 Textured White

Optical control: 5 x 2.4W LED High Efficiency Side Emitting Lens

Materials

Head: Corrosion protected aluminium

Glazing: Acrylic




For ease of installation product comes pre-wired with 1m of flexible cable

B

C

A

ØC

B

A

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C

Angled 300 600 178 8.0

Flat 210 275 89 7.3


Angled

Flat

DB

703

DB 27 26 10 40

RAL

9007

RAL

9006

RAL

9005

RAL

9016




Options

Kona Maximum lamp wattage: 150W


Gear: Electronic gear, some models

Light source: 35W CDM-T (Electronic Gear) 70W CDM-T (Electronic Gear) 150W CDM-T (Magnetic Gear)

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium

Optical control: Narrow beam Medium beam Wide beam

Materials






Product is supplied with M16 gland for Ø5 – 10mm round cable

Control gear is integral to the luminaire


Light Hood Black: KLH-10 Aluminium: KLH-26

Pole Mounting Bracket (to fit pole Ø60 – Ø76) Black: KPB-10 Aluminium: KPB-26

KonaIP66 | IK08 | CLASS I | CLASS II

Electronic Gear Magnetic Gear

Kona

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C D

480 165 255 125 5.8

Example

1. Model

KON KON

2. Optical Control


M Medium Beam – 30° M

W Wide Beam – 70°

3. Light Source

035C 35W CDM-T

070C 70W CDM-T 070C

150C 150W CDM-T

4. Colour



Example Code = KON M 070C 10

Product Codes

Optional Light Hood

• Wall mounted spot light with three beam angled versions to create different lit effects

• The head adjusts in two planes: 90º vertical and 180º horizontal

• Optional light hood offers additional control

• Pole mounting can be achieved using additional bracket


Narrow beam 10º

Medium beam 30º

Wide beam 70º Bergamo, Italy



Options

Vertica LED 1 70mm Ø

Vertica LED 2 110mm Ø



Light source: LED Array

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey RAL 9106 White

Optical control: Narrow beam Medium beam Wide beam

Vertica LED 1 3 x 1W LED per window

Vertica LED 2 5 x 1W LED per window

Materials


Seals: Silicone rubber gaskets




Cable entry via rubber cable gland

Driver is integral to the luminaire

Vertica LEDVertica LED Product Codes

Lamped Vertica

• Wall mounted for wall washing or accent lighting

• Choice of single or dual emission for different lighting effects

• Available with three beam angles

• Available in two sizes

• See pages 206 – 207 for lamped versions

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C

Vertica LED 1 220 120 70 1.5

Vertica LED 2 400 170 110 2.1


Vertica LED 1 – 70mm Ø

Vertica LED 2 – 100mm Ø

Narrow beam 10°

Wide beam 50°

Narrow beam 10°

Medium beam 30°

IP65 | IK08 | CLASS I | CLASS II(110mm Ø) (70mm Ø)

Example

1. Model

VERL VERL VERL

2. Style

1 70mm Ø 070

2 110mm Ø

3. Light Emission

01 01 1 Way

02 02 2 Way 02

4. Optical Control

NB NB Narrow Beam – 10° NB



5. Light Source

WW WW Warm White 3000K WW

NW NW Neutral White 4000K

CW CW Cool White 6000K

6. Colour

10 10 RAL 9005 Black 10

26 26 RAL 9006 Aluminium

20 20 RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

40 40 RAL 9016 White

Example Code = VERL 070 02 NB WW 10

Clivedon Road, Buckinghamshire



VerticaIP65 | IK08 | CLASS I

Vertica

Vertica Tall

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C

Short 280 265 180 4.8

Tall 500 265 180 8.8

Tall Short Example

1. Model

VERT VERS VERT

2. Light Source

035C 035C 35W CDM-T 035C

070C 70W CDM-T

3. Light Output

01 01 1 Way

02 02 2 Way 02

4. Beam Angle

NB Narrow Beam – 16° NB



5. Colour

10 10 RAL 9005 Black 10

26 26 RAL 9006 Aluminium

20 20 RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey

40 40 RAL 9016 White

Example Code = VERT 035C 02 NB 10

Product Codes

• Wall mounted for wall washing or accent lighting

• Choice of single or dual emission for different lighting effects

• Available with three beam angles

• Two height options

• See pages 204 – 205 for LED versions

Vertica Short

Options

Vertica Tall Maximum lamp wattage – 2 x 70W CDM-T

Vertica Short Maximum lamp wattage – 1 x 35W CDM-T


Light source: Vertica Tall 1 x or 2 x 35W, 70W CDM-T

Vertica Short 1 x 35W CDM-T


Optical control: Vertica Tall Wide beam Narrow beam

Vertica Short Medium beam

Materials


Seals: Silicone rubber gaskets



Access via stainless steel screws

Wiring via two rubber glands for flexible cable


Vertica short

Vertica tall

Medium beam 30°

Narrow beam 16º

Wide beam 100°

Vertica Short St. Martin’s Quarter, Worcester



Vertica Talbot Green Retail Park, Wales



TatraIP65 | IK07 | CLASS I

Tatra

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B

210 200 2.4 (max)

Aluminium finish

Stanhope Road, St Albans

Example

1. Model

TAR TAR

2. Light Source

018P 18W PL-T

W White LED W

3. Colour

10 RAL 9005 Black



40 RAL 9016 White

Example Code = TAR W 20

Product Codes

• Surface mounted low level marker, to define the borders of paths or buildings

• For mounting directly on the ground or on walls

• Subtle lit effect created by diffusing light through sandblasted glass

• Choice of compact fluorescent or LED light source

Options

Tatra Tatra LED

Glazing: Sandblasted glass

Light source: 18W PL-T White LED

Mounting: Flange plate


Materials






LED version: driver is integral to the luminaire

Cable entry via M20 gland for Ø10 – 14mm round cable


Tatra Tatra LED



AventisIP65 | IK10 | CLASS I

AventisLarge Small Example

1. Model

AVL AVS AVL

2. Style

P P Plain P

E E Eyelid

3. Light Source

028D 1 x 28W 2D

038D 1 x 38W 2D

028DE 1 x 28W 2D EMR

038DE 1 x 38W 2D EMR

010P 1 x 10W PL-C

013P 1 x 13W PL-C

018P 1 x 18W PL-C

218P 2 x 18W PL-C

226P 2 x 26W PL-C

LED LED LED Array LED

LEDE LEDE LED Array EMR

4. Colour

10 10 Black 10

82 82 Aluminium

Example Code = AVL P LED 10

Product Codes

• Surface mounted luminaire to light the exterior of buildings

• Tough polycarbonate diffuser for protection against vandalism

• Now available in LED as well as compact fluorescent

• Motion detection sensors for further energy savings

• Emergency versions available

Kingshill Retail Centre, Kent

Options

Aventis Large Maximum lamp wattage: 2 x 26W

Aventis Small Maximum lamp wattage: 1 x 18W

Glazing: UV stabilised opal polycarbonate diffuser

Light source: LED Array LED Array EMR (integral emergency) 28, 38W 2D EMR (integral emergency) 1 x 10, 1 x 13, 1 x 18W PL-C 2 x 18, 2 x 26W PL-C

Colours: RAL 9005 Black RAL 9006 Aluminium

Other: Motion detection version for LED option available on request

Materials


Diffuser: UV stabilised opal polycarbonate



Control Gear: High frequency electronic


Access for relamping via Allen screws

Supplied with two M16 glands to allow loop-in, loop-out wiring for flexible cable only

LED version: driver is integral to the luminaire

Aventis Eyelid

PlainDimensions mm

Weight kg

Large A B

Plain 360 145 3.7 4.7•

Eyelid 360 155 4.5 5.5•

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

Small A B

Plain 265 100 1.5

Eyelid 265 105 1.9

•with emergency gear


Plain Eyelid


Illuminated LED Handrail 215

Market-leading performance

Bespoke LED handrail and balustrade system engineered to provide a choice of asymmetric or symmetric lighting distributions. Garda LED is manufactured in a durable grade 316 stainless steel and offers specifiers an innovative task-lighting solution with market-leading photometric performance and uniformity.

Suitable for a wide range of interior and exterior applications, with an emergency option available, Garda particularly comes into its own where access for maintenance is restricted such as stairways.

Providing glare-free lighting, with a downward facing light-source to eliminate upward light, Garda has an intelligent design that manages voltage drop over distances up to 40m, meaning constant light levels through a single power feed, low energy consumption and negligible maintenance through high-power LEDs.

Available in straight, curved or arched sections, with round or square stanchions, a wide selection of in-fill options and finishing details such as a warm-to-touch coating, Garda offers a total solution from concept to completion that includes a full site survey, project management and installation.

Illuminated LED Handrail

Providing a bespoke concept

to completion solution

Design Philosophy216 – 217

Garda LED Handrail218 – 219

How to Illuminate Areas using Garda LED Handrail220 – 221

Garda with staged dimming to 25% of full output, illuminated both sides with an asymmetric distribution Hyde Park Corner, London

216 Illuminated LED Handrail



Garda design philosophy

Lea Bridge Underpass, Hackney

SCRM Building, Edinburgh

HandrailHandrails are typically used to provide guidance, stability or support to pedestrians. Garda is available with an asymmetric or symmetric distribution to best suit your application – whether affixing to a wall or from a more central location through the support of stanchions.

BalustradeBalustrade is the term used to describe the entire handrail system, including stanchions and infill. As a general rule, any unprotected edge of a walkway, platform, staircase or other raised area from which a person may fall more than 0.5m must be fitted with such a system. Garda’s asymmetric beam angle is ideally suited to such applications and complies with Building Regulations Part K. Light is directed where it is needed, enabling excellent facial recognition whilst minimising light spill into sensitive areas such as waterways, thus reducing any potential impact on wildlife.

Typical applicationsGarda provides an excellent solution across a wide range of both internal and external applications. From lighting internal staircases, balconies and ramps to exterior spaces such as bridges, walkways and parks, the Garda LED Illuminated Handrail has the ability to adapt to every setting.

Crayford Waterside, Kent

Essex Street Steps, London

Garda key advantages Style

• Bespoke welded construction with no visible joints

Performance

• Market-leading photometric performance, with unparalleled uniformity: Garda illuminates pathways in excess of two metres wide

• Extremely high strength mechanical design, with a 3mm wall thickness

Control

• Symmetric distribution with purpose designed high performance prismatic lens

• Genuine asymmetric distribution achieved through purpose-designed micro-reflector and high performance asymmetric prismatic lens

Award for Urban Lighting:Essex Street Steps

Exterior Luminaire of the Year

Award-winning design

Hyde Park Corner, London

Leominster Station

218 Illuminated LED Handrail



Options

Linear and flexible modular lengths available: 300mm 600mm 900mm 1200mm

Light source: 300mm: 3 LED (3.6W) 600mm: 6 LED (7.2W) 900mm: 9 LED (10.8W) 1200mm: 12 LED (14.4W)

L70 lifetime prediction: In excess of 60,000 hours

Colour temperature: Neutral White 4000K Warm White 3000K

Colour rendering index: 75 / 85Ra

Optical control: Symmetric distribution – 112º beam angle Asymmetric distribution – 56º beam angle

Balusters: Circular stanchions as standard

Square and other shapes on request

Power supply options: 24V to 48V AC or DC, Class III SELV, 350mA

Range of power supplies available

Emergency option available (3 hour duration)

Other: Anti-tamper screws fitted as standard

Warm-to-touch coating available

Materials

LED Module

Body: Anodised extruded aluminium

End Caps: Injection moulded polycarbonate

Glazing: Extruded polycarbonate

Railing System

Rail and Stanchions: Grade 316 stainless steel with a wall thickness of 3mm


Garda LED illuminated handrail is an integrated, seamlessly welded, bespoke solution and as such requires a high level of expertise and knowledge in its design, fabrication and installation

DW Windsor provides a complete survey, design and installation service as standard to ensure we support your project from concept through to completion

Standard Infill Options GardaIP66 | IK10 | CLASS III

Garda

• Bespoke LED handrail and balustrade system

• Grade 316 stainless steel

• Choice of genuine asymmetric or symmetric distributions providing market-leading uniformity

• Straight or flexible modules for straight, curved or arched rails

• Available in Warm White 3000K or Neutral White 4000K to suit internal and external applications

• Dimmable

• Emergency option available

Hyde Park Corner, London

Handrail Dimensions

Glass

Tension Wire

Solid Bar

A wide selection of infill options and materials are available

Please contact us to discuss any special infill requirements

Please note information shown is not exhaustive and may be subject to change as technology continually evolves or to best suit project requirements

Working with youFrom concept to completion, DW Windsor provides a comprehensive service including:

• Full site survey

• Lighting and structural design

• Custom manufacture

• Installation by our specialist stainless steel contractors

• Full project management and technical guidance

Please contact us on 01992 474600 for further information on the full range of services provided for Garda or see dww-garda.com/dwwindsor.com

Ø50

3


Asymmetric distribution 56° beam angle

Symmetric distribution 112° beam angle


Illuminated LED Handrail 221220 Illuminated LED Handrail

How to illuminate areas using Garda LED Handrail

Essex Street Steps case study

Before (see image above)

• Uninviting cut-through from Temple tube station to the Royal Courts of Justice

• Difficulty with maintaining high level luminaire and short life of lamp used (70W CDO-TT)

After (see image left)

Single sided asymmetric Garda LED Handrail providing;

• Improved public and workforce safety

• Reduced carbon footprint through decreased maintenance cycles

• Central Management System operated for greater control

Stair cases

Wide stair cases with centre handrails should utilise the symmetric distribution modules to provide an even spread of lighting up the centre of a walkway. If required asymmetric modules can be positioned at the sides to increase the coverage further. On narrow flights single sided asymmetric modules will be sufficient to achieve levels in excess of 100lux at ground level.

Ramps & walkways

Generally lighting levels as laid out in the British Standards and the Disability Discrimination Act 2005 can be met from a single sided arrangement on areas up to two metres wide, asymmetric distribution modules should be spaced suitably apart either as wall or balustrade mounted to ensure good ground uniformity between modules. If a walkway is next to a river or area of environmental sensitivity then use of the asymmetric distribution module will ensure light is only placed where it is required, limiting back spill.

Open footbridges

Footbridges with open side railings such as road or rail bridges should be lit in such a way that modules are facing away from users below the level of the bridge to avoid any unnecessary glare, this practice should also be considered for the users of the bridge itself so as they ascend light sources are directed away from their field of vision as much as practically possible.

Continuous lighting

In order to provide a good level of uniformity required for the above task areas, the lighting should be as continuous as possible throughout the handrail. Illuminating small sections and curved handrail ensure that there are no dark patches or un-lit areas which lead to reduced uniformity levels and patchy looking lighting.

Control of glare

An important factor to consider when lighting open staircases, ramps and walkways is minimalising any glare which may affect the usage of the area. Various methods can be introduced in order to block unwanted light from escaping to areas adjacent to the lighting scheme, but best practice would be to not generate glare in the first instance. Ensuring that any light is focused towards the task areas without having to incline the light source will further reduce the possibilities of creating glare.

The Garda LED modules provide a genuine asymmetric light output which allows a wide area of footpath or stairway to be illuminated with zero inclination to the LED module. This will provide a glare free lighting solution without having to inline the LED module and expose the bright light emitted from the product.

General information

Light levels at ground level can be expected at the following distances from the modules:

0 – 1.25m: 100lux

1.25 – 1.5m: 50lux

1.5 – 1.75m: 25lux

Garda LED Handrail, illuminated from one side with an asymmetric distribution Essex Street Steps, London

Type Day Night

Eav

luxEmin

luxEav

luxEmin

lux

Subways

Open - - 50 25

Enclosed 350 150 100 50

Footbridges

Open - - 30 15

Enclosed 350 150 100 50

Stairways / Ramps

Open - - 30 15

Enclosed 350 150 100 50

NB. Extract taken from BS 5489-1:2003 Table 4

Before installation – Essex Street Steps, London

Stairs with central symmetric and peripheral asymmetric modules provide required levels of light

Footbridge over rail track. Asymmetric modules face away from the track to avoid drivers experiencing glare from the steps

[email protected] – [email protected]

50 – [email protected]


Illuminated Bollards 223

Precise, timeless engineering

Illuminated Bollards

Pharola-Max230 – 231

Lago226 – 227

Pharola228 – 229

Trebem224 – 225

Cannon & Eton244 – 245

Polar & Vector242 – 243

Nexus & Riga240 – 241

Rona238 – 239

Silka232 – 235

Silka-Max236 – 237

The contrasting styles of our contemporary LED bollards and timeless classics demonstrates the wide scope of this range of illuminated bollards. They offer a solution on their own or in conjunction with our wide range of complementary column-mounted or in-ground products, to define pedestrian entrances and paths or highlight walkways through urban areas.

Made to withstand the test of time, these bollards are manufactured from vandal resistant, durable materials with LED options, to ensure longevity of the installation. Designed to complement their surroundings by day they provide good optical control by night.

Silka-Max Royal Terrace Gardens, Torquay

Using LEDs in classic designs demonstrates

the wide scope of this range


Illuminated Bollards 225224 Illuminated Bollards

TrebemIP65 | IK10 | CLASS I

• Robust steel i-beam with LED array

• Base compartment option to allow installation of electrical cut out if required

• Two mounting height options

Product CodesTrebem Options

Trebem 1000mm and 2200mm installation heights Twin LED option lighting both ways


Mounting: With root or flange plate mounting

Light source: 3 x 3W LEDs Warm white 3000K Neutral white 4500K Cool white 6000K

Colours: DB 703 Textured Metallic Dark Grey RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Textured Aluminium RAL 9005 Textured Black RAL 9016 Textured White

Optical control: Performance LED Array

Other: Double sided arrangement available for two-way illumination

Materials

Body: Steel

Cover Plate: Steel

Finish: Two-pack acrylic wet spray paint


Supplied with 1 metre of flexible cable for ease of installation

Base compartment: Cable access compartment with space for electrical termination available on request


Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C

260 1000 150 35

260 2200 150 75

DB

703

DB 27

RAL

9007

26

RAL

9006

10

RAL

9005

40

RAL

9016


250mm

500mm

750mm

1000mm

1250mm

1500mm

1750mm

2000mm

2250mm


Example

1. Model

TRE TRE

2. Height

010 1000mm 010

022 2200mm

3. Mounting

R Root R

F Flange Plate

4. Light Source

WW Warm White LED – 3000K WW

NW Neutral White LED – 4500K

CW Cool White LED – 6000K



Example Code = TRE 010 R WW DB




LagoIP66 | IK10 | CLASS II

• Contemporary design with slim vertical elements supporting the light source

• 1000mm and 1300mm versions available

• Low profile head

• Low energy consumption

Lago

Wood effect front panel

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C

200 1000 130 7

200 1300 130 8.5

Options

Lago 1000mm and 1300mm installation heights

Mounting: Flange plate only

Glazing: Polycarbonate lens LED module

Gear, switching and control: Low voltage IP67 Driver

Light source: 4 LEDs – 9W total Neutral white – 4500K

Colours: RAL 7016 Anthracite Grey Golden Oak


Materials

Body: Aluminium


Glazing: Polycarbonate lens



Product is supplied with single outgoing flexible cable for easy installation



Example

1. Model

LAG LAG

2. Height

010 1000mm 010

013 1300mm

3. Colour

20 RAL 7016 Antracite Grey 20

AY Golden Oak

Example Code = LAG 010 20

Product Codes

250mm

500mm

750mm

1000mm

1250mm

1500mm

1750mm

2000mm




PharolaIP65 | IK10 | CLASS I

• Slim, elegant, styling

• Uniform 360º lighting distribution

• Three bollard heights and complimentary wall mounted versions (see pages 200 – 201) for cohesive project design

• Excellent thermal management of LEDs for high lumen output and long LED life

Product CodesPharola Options

Bollards 600mm 1000mm 2200mm

Wall mounted version See pages 200 – 201 for details

Mounting: Integral root Flange plate First-fix root system for simple steel wire armour cable termination available on request Wall mounted

Glazing: Diffused acrylic

Gear, switching and control: Complete with mains voltage LED driver

Light source: 5 x 2.4W LED Neutral white – 4100K



Other: 180º light shield Custom heights available to order Body in stainless steel or aluminium to order

Materials


Glazing: Acrylic

Body: Galvanised steel




Product is supplied with single outgoing flexible cable for easy installation


250mm

500mm

750mm

1000mm

1250mm

1500mm

1750mm

2000mm

2250mm

2500mm

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C

600 89 300 9

1000 89 500 13

2200 89 500 21


Pharola-Wall Angled

Pharola-Wall Flat

Royal Terrace Gardens, Torquay


Example

1. Model

PHA PHA

2. Height

060 600mm Bollard

010 1000mm Bollard 010

022 2200mm Light Post

W Wall Mount

3. Mounting

R Root R

F Flange Plate

4. Light Source

NW Neutral White LED – 4100K NW



6. Back Shield

B With 180°back shield B

N Without 180°back shield

Example Code = PHA 010 R NW DB B

DB

703

DB 27

RAL

9007

26

RAL

9006

10

RAL

9005

40

RAL

9016




Pharola-MaxIP65 | IK10 | CLASS I

• Increased diameter version of the Pharola

• Complete with door for cable termination access

• Choice of two head options

Product CodesPharola-Max

Pharola-Max PM2

Options

PM1 Head height: 150mm Overall height: 900mm/3000mm

PM2 Head height: 250mm Overall height: 1000mm/3000mm

Mounting: Integral root (standard) Flange plate

Glazing: Diffused polycarbonate

Gear, switching and control: Integral LED driver

Light source: 12 x 2.4W LEDs Warm White – 3000K Neutral White – 4100K



Other: 180º light shield Custom heights available to order

Materials


Glazing: Polycarbonate

Post: Galvanised steel




Cabling and product access through door

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C D

PM1152 900 150 300 17

152 3000 150 300 32

PM2152 1000 250 300 18

152 3000 250 300 33


250mm

500mm

750mm

1000mm

1250mm

1500mm

1750mm

2000mm

2250mm

Example

1. Model

PM1 150mm Head PM1

PM2 250mm Head

2. Height

009 900mm Bollard

010 1000mm Bollard 010

030 030 3000mm Bollard

3. Mounting

R R Root R

F F Flange Plate

4. Light Source

WW WW Warm White LED – 3000K

NW NW Neutral White LED – 4100K NW


27 27 RAL 9007 Textured Metallic Grey 27

6. Back Shield

B B With 180°back shield B

N N Without 180°back shield

Example Code = PM1 010 R NW 27 B

PM1

PM1PM2

PM2

DB

703

DB 27

RAL

9007

26

RAL

9006

10

RAL

9005

40

RAL

9016




SilkaIP55 | IK10 | CLASS I

• Robust and corrosion resistant construction

• Available in brushed stainless steel or painted galvanised steel

• Choice of lamps or LEDs including RGB

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C with flange with root

Silka 1 2000 450 170 23 30

Silka 2 2700 560 170 31 37

Silka 3 3500 560 170 41 49

Silka 4 4000 660 170 46 55

Product CodesSilka Options

Silka 1 2.0m Silka 2 2.7m Silka 3 3.5m Silka 4 4.0m Custom heights available to order

Mounting: With root or flange plate mounting Bolt-on root also available

Glazing: Opal polycarbonate

Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear

Light source: LED: White or RGB 2 x 24W, 2 x 36W, 2 x 54W PL-L RGB colour change available on request

Colours: RAL 9007 Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Aluminium Stainless steel (brushed) Other RAL colours available on request

Materials

Glazing tube: UV stabilised opal polycarbonate glazing

Body: Galvanised steel (standard) Stainless steel

Finish: Polyester powder coated (standard) Brushed and passivated (stainless steel only)

Bolt on root: Galvanised steel


Simple wiring via a mains connection within the base of the luminaire head

Optional accessories Bolt-on root SIL-R (all versions)


B

ØC

A

Silk

a 1

Silk

a 2

Silk

a 3

Silk

a 4

Example

1. Model

SI SI SI SI

2. Height

1 2.0m 1

2 2.7m

3 3.5m

4 4.0m

3. Mounting

R R R Root R

F F F Flange

4. Light Source

224L 2 x 24W PL-L 224L

236L 2 x 36W PL-L

255L 2 x 55W PL-L

WLED WLED WLED White LED Array

RLED RLED RLED RGB LED Array


26 26 26 RAL 9006 Aluminium 26

Example Code = SI 1 R 224L 26

2.0m

3.0m

4.0m

5.0m

1.5m

2.5m

3.5m

4.5m

1.0m

0.5m

Stai

nles

s St

eel

727 26

RAL

9007

RAL

9006

Model A B C

All versions 240mm 800mm 114mm





Silka Bengeworth School, Evesham



Silka-MaxIP55 | IK10 | CLASS I

• Increased height version of Silka

• Available in brushed stainless steel or painted galvanised steel

• Available in stainless steel, aluminium or galvanised steel

• Choice of lamps or LEDs including RGB

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C with flange with root

Silka-Max 4 4000 1280 170 32 39

Silka-Max 5 5000 1280 170 40 48

Silk

a-M

ax 4

Silk

a-M

ax 5

2.0m

3.0m

4.0m

5.0m

1.5m

2.5m

3.5m

4.5m

1.0m

0.5m

Product CodesSilka-Max Options

Silka-Max 4 4.0m

Silka-Max 5 5.0m Custom heights available to order


Glazing: Opal polycarbonate

Gear, switching and control: Electronic gear

Light source: LED: white or RGB 2 x 36W T8 RGB colour change available on request

Colours: RAL 9007 Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Aluminium Stainless steel (brushed) Other RAL colours available on request

Materials

Glazing tube: UV stabilised opal polycarbonate glazing

Body: Galvanised steel (standard) Stainless steel

Finish: Polyester powder coated (standard) Brushed and passivated (stainless steel only)

Bolt on root: Galvanised steel



Optional accessories Bolt-on root SIL4-R (Silka-Max 4) SIL5-R (Silka-Max 5)

Ø C

B

A

Example

1. Model

SIM SIM SIM

2. Height

4 4.0m 4

5 5.0m

3. Mounting

R R Root R

F F Flange Plate

4. Light Source

236T 236T 2 x 36W T8 236T

WLED WLED White LED Array

RLED RLED RGB LED Array


26 26 RAL 9006 Aluminium 26

Example Code = SIM 4 R 236T 26


Model A B C

Silka-Max 4 240mm 800mm 114mm

Silka-Max 5 240mm 1200mm 114mm


Stai

nles

s St

eel

727 26

RAL

9007

RAL

9006




RonaRona


• Clear glazing

• Robust construction

• Area lighting main optic with optional spot light for highlighting architectural features

Options

Rona 1 4.0m Rona 2 4.5m


Glazing: Clear Polycarbonate

Light source: 70W, 150W CDM-T 35W CDM-R optional spotlight

Colours: RAL 9007 Metallic Grey RAL 9006 Aluminium Other RAL colours available on request

Materials

Body: Aluminium


Bolt-on root: Galvanised steel



Optional accessories Bolt-on root RON-R (all versions)


Optional spot lightDimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C

200 4000 800 46•

200 4500 1300 52•

B

C

ØA

•add 5kg for additional spot light

Product Codes

2.0m

3.0m

4.0m

5.0m

1.5m

2.5m

3.5m

4.5m

1.0m

0.5m

Example

1. Model

RON RON RON

2. Height

1 4.0m

2 4.5m 2

3. Mounting

R R Root R

F F Flange

4. Light Source

070C 070C 70W CDM-T 070C

150C 150C 150W CDM-T

5. Optional Spot Light

Y Y 35W CDM-T Spot Light Y

N N No Spot Light

6 . Colour – for alternative colours see below

26 26 RAL 9006 Aluminium 26

Example Code = RON 2 R 070C Y 26

27 26

RAL

9007

RAL

9006


Model A B C

All versions 300mm 1000mm 114mm



Nexus & RigaIP65 | IK10 | CLASS I

• Styled to complement the Classic range of luminaires and lighting columns (See pages 90 & 256)

• Available in lamped or LED versions

• Cone Optic™ allows for extended spacings of bollards with excellent uniformity

• Improved vandal resistance with tough polycarbonate glazing

• Optional specular back shield projects unwanted light forwards

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C D

Nexus 1000 186 152 300 21

Riga 1000 197 152 300 22

Product CodesNexus & Riga Options

Nexus or Riga Maximum lamp wattage: 70W


Glazing: Clear polycarbonate

Light source: 12 x 2.4W LEDs Warm White – 3000K Neutral White – 4100K 45W, 60W CosmoPolis 50W, 70W StreetWise 50, 70W SON-T+ 35, 70W CDM-T 70W CDO-TT 42W PL-T


Optical control: LED Array Cone Optic™ reflector (standard) Anodised aluminium louvre

Other: Electronic gear, some models

Specular back shield (180º cut-off) up to 50W lamp maximum

Materials

Head: Corrosion protected cast aluminium


Cone Optic: Anodised aluminium

Body: Galvanised steel tube





Riga

AD

ØB

Nexus

ØC

Riga

ØB

AD

ØC

Nexus Riga Example

1. Model

NEB RIB NEB

2. Optic

C C Cone Optic™ C

A A Anodised Louvre

3. Control Gear

E E Electronic Gear: available in all light sources E


4. Light Source



035C 035C 35W CDM-T

070C 070C 70W CDM-T

042P 042P 42W PL-T



L130 L130 Warm White LED – 3000K

L141 L141 Neutral White LED – 4100K


10 10 RAL 9005 Black 10

6. Back Shield

B B With 180°back shield (max 50W lamps) B

N N Without 180°back shield

Example Code = NEB C E 045W 10 B

Optical Distributions

Cone Optic™ with 180º Back shield

Cone Optic™

250mm

500mm

750mm

1000mm

1250mm

1500mm

1750mm

2000mm

Nexus

Nexus Riga

Riga Windsor & Maidenhead Town Hall


RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005



VectorPolar

Polar & VectorIP65 | IK10 | CLASS I

• Styled to complement the Classic range of luminaires and lighting columns (See pages 90 & 256)

• Available in lamped or LED versions


• Improved vandal resistance with tough polycarbonate glazing


Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C D

Polar 1000 186 152 300 21

Vector 1000 186 152 300 21

Product CodesPolar & Vector Options

Polar or Vector Maximum lamp wattage: 70W



Light source: 12 x 2.4W LEDs Warm White – 3000K Neutral White – 4100K 45W, 60W CosmoPolis 50W, 70W StreetWise 50, 70W SON-T+ 35, 70W CDM-T 70W CDO-TT 42W PL-T


Optical control: LED Array Cone Optic™ reflector (standard) Anodised aluminium louvre

Other: Electronic gear, some models

Specular back shield (180º cut-off) up to 50W lamp maximum

Materials

Head: Corrosion protected cast aluminium


Cone Optic: Anodised aluminium

Body: Galvanised steel tube





Polar

ØB

AD

ØC

Vector

ØB

AD

ØC

Polar Vector Example

1. Model

POB VEB VEB

2. Optic

C C Cone Optic™ C

A A Anodised Louvre

3. Control Gear

E E Electronic Gear: available in all light sources E


4. Light Source



035C 035C 35W CDM-T

070C 070C 70W CDM-T

042P 042P 42W PL-T



L130 L130 Warm White LED – 3000K L130

L141 L141 Neutral White LED – 4100K


10 10 RAL 9005 Black 10

6. Back Shield

B B With 180°back shield (max 50W lamps)

N N Without 180°back shield N

Example Code = VEB C E L130 10 N

250mm

500mm

750mm

1000mm

1250mm

1500mm

1750mm

2000mm

2250mm

Optical Distributions

Cone Optic™ with 180º Back shield

Cone Optic™

Polar Vector

Polar Stanhope Road, St Albans


RAL

9005

10 20

RAL

7016

21

RAL

7037

81

PAN

762

1

27

RAL

9007

30

RAL

5003

50

RAL

6005



Cannon Eton

Cannon & Eton


• Styled to complement the Traditional range of luminaires and lighting columns (See pages 106 & 256)



• Lockable base compartment available for cable termination

Dimensions mm

Weight kg

A B C D

Cannon 1005 120 210 300 66

Eton 1000 160 200 300 57

Product CodesCannon & Eton Options

Cannon or Eton Maximum lamp wattage: 70W

Mounting: Integral 300mm root


Light source: 50W, 70W Streetwise 50W, 70W SON-T+ 35W, 70W CDM-T 70W CDO-TT 42W PL-T


Optical control: Cone Optic™ (standard) Polished aluminium louvre set

Other: Specular back shield (180° cut off), up to 50W lamp maximum

Details painted Gold

Materials

Body: Cast iron

Finish: Two pack acrylic



Lockable base compartment available for cable termination

RAL

9005

10 20 21 30 50 70

RAL

7016

RAL

7037

RAL

5003

RAL

6005

RAL

3005


Cannon

ØB

AD

C

ØB

AD

ØC

Eton

Cannon Eton Example

1. Model

CAN ETN CAN

2. Optic

C C Cone Optic™ C

L L Louvre

3. Control Gear

E E Electronic Gear: available E


4. Light Source



035C 035C 35W CDM-T

070C 070C 70W CDM-T

042P 042P 42W PL-T 042P


50 50 RAL 6005 Light Moss Green 50

6. Back Shield

B B With 180°back shield (max 50W lamps)

N N Without 180°back shield N

Example Code = CAN C E 042P 50 N

Cone Optic™ Back shield

Louvre


250mm

500mm

750mm

1000mm

1250mm

1500mm

1750mm

2000mm

2250mm

Cannon Eton

Cannon Belfry Hotel, Cambridge


Floodlighting 247

Flexibility built in

Floodlighting

Tizona250 – 251

Sabre252 – 253

Colada248 – 249

Floodlight Brackets254 – 255

Colada LED248 – 249

A comprehensive aesthetically pleasing range of functional floodlights providing performance illumination for a variety of applications: from accurate feature lighting of building façades, through road lighting, to floodlighting large areas such as sports pitches. A variety of light sources and distributions provide additional flexibility of scheme design, including asymmetric, narrow beam and our patented Diamond Optic®.

Complementary brackets, with distinct styling, match the floodlights and offer column or wall mounting options. Baffles reduce unwanted light spill to surrounding areas.

Tizona Ashkelon Train Station, Israel

A variety of light sources and

distributions provides additional

flexibility of scheme design


Floodlighting 249248 Floodlighting

ColadaIP66 | IK08 | CLASS I

Colada

• Choice of asymmetric or narrow beam reflectors to provide alternative lighting effects

• Available in two sizes: 70W – 150W and 150W – 400W

• Now available in LED• Stylish 500mm projection wall and

column brackets available

Product Codes


Colada 1 Asymmetric70W HQI-TS/CDM-TD/SON-TD 150W HQI-TS/CDM-TD/SON-TD

84-92°

62° 72°

8°-12°

30°-36°

15°-20°

Imax

Imax

32°-36°76-80°

38°-40° 12-16°

36°-50° 74-80°

10°-12°

17°-21°

Imax

140°

6°

Imax

140°

6°

12° 12°

84-92°

62° 72°

8°-12°

30°-36°

15°-20°

Imax

Imax

32°-36°76-80°

38°-40° 12-16°

36°-50° 74-80°

10°-12°

17°-21°

Colada 1 Narrow beam70W HQI-TS/CDM-TD/SON-TD 150W HQI-TS/CDM-TD/SON-TD

84-92°

62° 72°

8°-12°

30°-36°

15°-20°

Imax

Imax

32°-36°76-80°

38°-40° 12-16°

36°-50° 74-80°

10°-12°

17°-21°

84-92°

62° 72°

8°-12°

30°-36°

15°-20°

Imax

Imax

32°-36°76-80°

38°-40° 12-16°

36°-50° 74-80°

10°-12°

17°-21° Colada 2 Asymmetric150W SON-T+/CDO-TT 250W SON-T+/CDO-TT 400W SON-T+/HQI-BT/D 84-92°

62° 72°

8°-12°

30°-36°

15°-20°

Imax

Imax

32°-36°76-80°

38°-40° 12-16°

36°-50° 74-80°

10°-12°

17°-21°

84-92°

62° 72°

8°-12°

30°-36°

15°-20°

Imax

Imax

32°-36°76-80°

38°-40° 12-16°

36°-50° 74-80°

10°-12°

17°-21°

Colada 2 Narrow beam250W HQI-TS

84-92°

62° 72°

8°-12°

30°-36°

15°-20°

Imax

Imax

32°-36°76-80°

38°-40° 12-16°

36°-50° 74-80°

10°-12°

17°-21° 84-92°

62° 72°

8°-12°

30°-36°

15°-20°

Imax

Imax

32°-36°76-80°

38°-40° 12-16°

36°-50° 74-80°

10°-12°

17°-21° A C

B

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

Colada 1 268 340 105 5.1 0.08m2

Colada 2 410 540 153 13.2 0.18m2

Options

Colada 1 Maximum LED wattage: 39.6WColada 2 Maximum lamp wattage: 400WMounting: Bracket mountedGlazing: Toughened glassLight source: See product codesColour: RAL 9006 Aluminium Optical control: Asymmetric reflector Narrow beamOther: A full range of wall and column brackets is available See pages 254 – 255 for details

Materials

Body: Die cast aluminiumMounting: Steel bracket finished RAL 9006 AluminiumAccess: Captive socket head screwsSeals: Silicone rubber


Lamp access via 4 captive socket head screwsCable entry via PG11 gland for Ø5 – 10mm round cable (Colada 1)Cable entry via M20 gland for Ø10 – 14mm round cable (Colada 2)


Bergamo, Italy

Example

1. Model

CO1 CO2 CO2 CO2

2. Reflector

A A Asymmetric A

N N Narrow Beam

3. Light Source

070TD 70W CDM-TD/SON-TD


250TD 250W HQI-TS

150S 150W SON-T+/CDO-TT 150S

250S 250W SON-T+/CDO-TT

400S 400W SON-T+/HQI-BT/D



Example Code = CO2 A 150S

39.6W LED

39.6W LED

Colada

Colada LED

Double post top bracket Colada 2 CO2-DB

Light hood Colada 1 CO1-LH Colada 2 CO2-LH

Single post top bracket Colada 2 CO2-SB

Anti-dazzle external louvre Colada 1 CO1-EL Colada 2 CO2-EL



A C

B

TizonaIP66 | IK08 | CLASS I

Tizona Options

Tizona Maximum lamp wattage: 150WMounting: Bracket mountedGlazing: Toughened glassLight source: See product codesColour: RAL 9006 Aluminium Optical control: Diamond Optic® Asymmetric reflector Narrow beamOther: A full range of wall and column brackets is available See pages 254 – 255 for details

Materials

Body: Die cast aluminiumMounting: Steel bracket finished RAL 9006 AluminiumSeals: Silicone rubber


Lamp access via 4 captive socket head screwsCable entry via M16 gland for Ø5 – 10mm round cable


• Choice of mounting options• Range of reflectors including Diamond

Optic® to suit many applications including road lighting

• Timed ignitor fitted as standard

Product Codes

Tizona Narrow Beam70W, 150W CDM-T

6-7° 6°

12°-22°

45°

Imax

10°-12° 60-68°

17°-25°

15°

Imax

27°-52° 74-76°

8°-26°

15-45°

Imax

8°-52° 56-94°

6-7° 6°

12°-22°

45°

Imax

10°-12° 60-68°

17°-25°

15°

Imax

27°-52° 74-76°

8°-26°

15-45°

Imax

8°-52° 56-94°

6-7° 6°

12°-22°

45°

Imax

10°-12° 60-68°

17°-25°

15°

Imax

27°-52° 74-76°

8°-26°

15-45°

Imax

8°-52° 56-94°

Tizona Diamond Optic®

50W SON-T+/StreetWise 70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise 35W, 70W, 150W CDM-T

6-7° 6°

12°-22°

45°

Imax

10°-12° 60-68°

17°-25°

15°

Imax

27°-52° 74-76°

8°-26°

15-45°

Imax

8°-52° 56-94°

6-7° 6°

12°-22°

45°

Imax

10°-12° 60-68°

17°-25°

15°

Imax

27°-52° 74-76°

8°-26°

15-45°

Imax

8°-52° 56-94°

84-92°

62° 72°

8°-12°

30°-36°

15°-20°

Imax

Imax

32°-36°76-80°

38°-40° 12-16°

36°-50° 74-80°

10°-12°

17°-21°

Tizona Asymmetric70W SON-T+/CDO-TT/StreetWise 42W, 57W PL-T 70W, 150W CDM-TD/SON-TD


Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

310 385 160 8.0 0.1m2

Asymmetric Narrow Beam

Diamond Optic® Tizona Example

1. Model

TIZ A TIZ N TIZ D TIZ D

2. Light Source



042P 42W PL-T

057P 57W PL-T


150TD 150W CDM-TD/SONTD

035C 35W CDM-T

070C 070C 70W CDM-T

150C 150C 150W CDM-T 150C


A 5/35

B 10/10 B

C 31/35

D 5/25

Example Code = TIZ D 150C B


A 5/35 B 10/10

C 31/35 D 5/25


Double post top bracket TIZ-DB

Light hood TIZ-LH

Single post top bracket TIZ-SB

Anti-dazzle external louvre TIZ-EL



SabreIP66 | IK08 | CLASS I

Sabre

• Choice of reflectors including narrow beam for accurate illumination of architectural detail

• Range of light spill reducing accessories to suit most applications

• Timed ignitor fitted as standard• Tool-less maintenance via quick

release latches

Product Codes

Dimensions mm

Weight kg Windage

A B C

250 – 400W 293 663 485 15 0.2m2

600 – 1000W 293 663 556 11.2 0.2m2

Options

Sabre 250W – 400W: integral control gearSabre Plus 600W – 1000W: remote control gear Ignitor separately housed on luminaireMounting: Bracket mountedGlazing: Toughened glassLight source: See product codesColour: RAL 9006 Aluminium Optical control: Asymmetric reflector Narrow beamOther: A full range of wall and column brackets is available See pages 254 – 255 for details

Materials

Body: Corrosion protected die cast aluminiumMounting: Steel bracket finished RAL 9006 AluminiumAccess: Extruded aluminium latchesSeals: Silicone rubber


Ease of maintenance via large quick release latches600W and 1000W options have remote control gearGear box:

Cable entry via M20 gland for Ø10 – 14mm round cable


A

B

C

354 315

328 160

195

Sabre

Sabre Plus

Asymmetric Narrow Beam Example

1. Model

SAB SAB SAB

2. Reflector

A Asymmetric

N Narrow Beam N

3. Light Source

250S 250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/HQI-T/D

400S 400W SON-T+/HQI-T/D

600S 600W SON-T+

001S 1000W SON-T

001H 1000W HPI-T

250SD 250W SON-TD 250SD

400SD 400W SON-TD

250HD 250W HQI-TS

400HD 400W HQI-TS

Example Code = SAB N 250SD


82-84º24-30º

86-92º22-42º45º 14

-15º

Imax

84-90º18-41º55º 10

-12º

Imax

18-24º10-14º

74-80º22-26º

90-100º20-38º45º 14

-15º

Imax

84-92°

62° 72°

8°-12°

30°-36°

15°-20°

Imax

Imax

32°-36°76-80°

38°-40° 12-16°

36°-50° 74-80°

10°-12°

17°-21°

Sabre Narrow Beam250W, 400W SON-TD 250W, 400W HQI-TS

82-84º24-30º

86-92º22-42º45º 14

-15º

Imax

84-90º18-41º55º 10

-12º

Imax

18-24º10-14º

74-80º22-26º

90-100º20-38º45º 14

-15º

Imax

84-92°

62° 72°

8°-12°

30°-36°

15°-20°

Imax

Imax

32°-36°76-80°

38°-40° 12-16°

36°-50° 74-80°

10°-12°

17°-21°

82-84º24-30º

86-92º22-42º45º 14

-15º

Imax

84-90º18-41º55º 10

-12º

Imax

18-24º10-14º

74-80º22-26º

90-100º20-38º45º 14

-15º

Imax

84-92°

62° 72°

8°-12°

30°-36°

15°-20°

Imax

Imax

32°-36°76-80°

38°-40° 12-16°

36°-50° 74-80°

10°-12°

17°-21°

Sabre Plus Asymmetric600W SON-T+ 1000W SON-T 1000W HPI-T

Sabre Asymmetric250W SON-T+/CDO-TT/HQI-T/D 400W SON-T+/HQI-T/D

Double post top bracket To fit column shaft Ø60 – Ø76 SAB-DB

Light hood SAB-LH

Single post top bracket To fit column shaft Ø60 – Ø76 SAB-SB

Anti-dazzle external louvre SAB-EL



Floodlight Brackets

Floodlight Brackets

Our range of wall and column brackets for the Colada, Colada LED, Tizona and Sabre floodlights offers a distinctive style that perfectly complements these luminaires

Product Codes

Colada 1 Wall Bracket

Colada 1 Column Bracket

Colada 2 Wall Bracket

Colada 2 Column Bracket

Tizona Wall Bracket

Tizona Column Bracket

Sabre Wall Bracket

Sabre Column Bracket

Colada 1, 2, Tizona & Sabre Brackets Example

1. Model

CO1 CO1 CO2 CO2 TIZ TIZ SAB SAB CO1

2. Bracket

WB CB1 WB CB1 WB CB1 WB CB1 Single

CB2-90 CB2-90 CB2-90 CB2-90 Double arm 90º

CB2-180 CB2-180 CB2-180 CB2-180 Double arm 180º CB2-180

CB3-90 CB3-90 CB3-90 CB3-90 Three arm 90º

CB3-120 CB3-120 CB3-120 CB3-120 Three arm 120º

CB4 CB4 CB4 CB4 Four arm

Example Code = CO1 CB2-180

Colada 1: 1710

Colada 2: 2640

820 max

76 Ø

1850

930

600

76 Ø

370

2500

1200

800

76 Ø

400

400

Colada/Colada LED Column BracketsTizona Column BracketsSabre Column Brackets

Colada/Colada LED Wall BracketsTizona Wall BracketSabre Wall Bracket

Colada 2: 1450

Colada 1: 805

930

600Colada 1: 500

Colada 2: 1000

1200

800

400Colada 2: 1450

Colada 1: 805

930

600Colada 1: 500

Colada 2: 1000

1200

800

400

Colada 2: 1450

Colada 1: 805

930

600Colada 1: 500

Colada 2: 1000

1200

800

400

Colada 1: 1710

Colada 2: 2640

820 max

76 Ø

1850

930

600

76 Ø

370

2500

1200

800

76 Ø

400

400

Options

Mounting: Wall bracket Column bracket: to fit 76mm Ø column topColour: RAL 9006 Aluminium Other: Optional single arm and 3 arm at 120º also available on request

Materials

Bracket: Wall bracket: steelColumn bracket: aluminium/steel

Colada 1: 1710

Colada 2: 2640

820 max

76 Ø

1850

930

600

76 Ø

370

2500

1200

800

76 Ø

400

400


Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars 257

Enriching lighting installations

Columns and brackets play an important role in creating a desirable day-time lighting scheme, with column height and bracket projection significant factors in establishing scale. By day, decorative brackets enhance the appearance of both traditional and contemporary lighting schemes and by night, illuminated finials can provide dramatic impact.

Providing a comprehensive lighting solution, DW Windsor offer a combined package of lanterns and columns. We design all of our columns according to sound engineering principles, taking into account structural weight and windage factors, with brackets and additional embellishments, including hanging baskets and banner arms, to add further interest.

In addition to our standard products we also offer a bespoke column design service, with unique details or finishes for a truly special solution (see our Special Columns pages 266 – 269).

Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

Columns Technical Details272 – 273

C

B

A

D

E

Feeder Pillars288 – 289

Pedestals278

Special Columns266 – 269

Wall Brackets286 – 287

Painting Columns & Brackets270 – 271

Standard Columns260 – 265

Finials284 – 285

Column Enhancements276 – 277

Column Brackets279 – 283

Special Structures258 – 259

Projection

Projection

Raise & Lower Columns274 – 275

EN 40 Column Standard290 – 291

EN40EN40EN40EN40EN40

We design all of our columns to

sound engineering principles

Sorento Westfield, Stratford City


Columns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars 259258 Columns, Brackets

Pedestals & Feeder Pillars

Whatever your dream, with our technological expertise and design experience, DW Windsor are the lighting partners of choice for challenging projects and an ambitious vision. From vertical steel structures that have a strong industrial feel, making a greater statement than conventional columns ever could, or a suite of 9m high arches carrying a moving light and sound show, we have a wealth of experience in the design, manufacture and, where required, installation of extremely special projects such as these.

For more information contact our customer service team: [email protected]

Special Structures

Six bespoke 9m high arches, each spanning 18.7m and weighing more than 8 tonnes. Brilliance, Blackpool

Bespoke conical, inclined and curved column carrying special luminaire and projector housing. Blackpool

Images courtesy of Robe Lighting

There are times when a touch of extraordinary is required in a streetscape; a wow-factor or visual tour de force during daylight hours and when darkness falls, the scheme comes to life.




Ely on 5m Chester column Ingress Park Dartford

Our expert team are on hand to offer guidance and advice, ensuring your project meets both aesthetic requirement and perhaps more importantly, relevant standards: all of our lighting columns are manufactured using the latest techniques and machinery, designed and manufactured in strict accordance with EN 40.

ColumnsColumns for Every Environment

Rio on 8m tapered column St. Martins Quarter, Worcester

Lighting columns are available in a wide range of styles and sizes to suit just about any application. Whether it’s a 5m tubular column carrying a utility luminaire or a bespoke column carrying multiple light sources, unique brackets and a host of additional loads, at DW Windsor we’re able to supply columns to meet your needs and vision.




Milano LED on 5m tapered aluminium column Heron Tower, London

Standard Columns

Standard Columns

For the relevant root and flange installation details for the columns illustrated on this page please see page 273

We have illustrated a selection of columns from our standard range. Variant and special versions can also be supplied to your particular requirements.

The most common material used in the manufacture of lighting columns is steel. Tubular, tapered, embellished-tubular, hinged and curved columns are available in this material.

Aluminium is increasing in popularity as a column material and poles are available as tubular, tapered, hinged and curved profiles in this light-weight substrate.

Tapered stainless steel columns are available to special order and tubular versions are offered as well in a range of sizes.

If you have the need for something special, please contact Customer Services on 01992 474600 or email [email protected]

Larg

e Ca

mbr

idge

10

m, 8

m

Larg

e O

xfor

d 10

m, 8

m

Larg

e Ch

este

r 10

m, 8

m

Cann

on

10m

, 8m

, 6m

, 5m

, 4m

Tubu

lar S

teel

/Tub

ular

Alu

min

ium

12

m, 1

0m, 8

m

Edin

burg

h 10

m, 8

m

Larg

e Ca

rdiff

10

m, 8

m

Tape

red

Stee

l/Ta

pere

d Al

umin

ium

10

m, 8

m, 6

m, 5

m, 4

m, v

ario

us ta

pers

Amax

10

m, 8

m, 6

m, 5

m, 4

m




Please note that ladder bars are actually fitted at 90º to the door but are shown as above for illustrative purposes. For the relevant root and flange installation details for the columns illustrated please see page 273

Please note our Cambridge, Oxford and Norwich column heights are to light source, actual column height does differ. Please refer to page 272 for further information.

All Norwich, Oxford and Cambridge columns up to 6m mounting height have cast bases with flange plate as standard.

Fabricated roots are available for these columns.

Windsor LED on 4m Oxford column St Paul’s Churchyard, London

Standard Columns Standard Columns

Vola

c 6m

, 5m

, 4m

Tape

red

Stee

l/Ta

pere

d Al

umin

ium

10

m, 8

m, 6

m, 5

m, 4

m, v

ario

us ta

pers

New

cast

le

6m, 5

m, 4

m

Ches

ter

6m, 5

m, 4

m

Mag

na

6m, 5

m, 4

m

Card

iff

6m, 5

m, 4

m

Tubu

lar S

teel

/ Tu

bula

r Alu

min

ium

6m

, 5m

, 4m

Cam

brid

ge

6m, 5

m, 4

m

Oxf

ord

6m, 5

m, 4

m

Nor

wic

h 5m

, 4m

, 3.3

m




Special Columns

Special Columns On this and the following page we show a number of columns in different materials that may inspire you to choose something really distinctive for your next project.

Our Special collection of timber and curved aluminium and steel columns are available in a range of shapes and profiles: tapered conical, parallel circular, square, even curved columns, the possibilities are almost endless.

The sustainable choice; the timber used in the production of our wooden columns comes from forests that are PEFC certified (Programme for the Endorsement of Forest Certification) which promotes sustainable forest management. For each tree cut down for the manufacture of our columns, two more are planted. Please visit pefc.org for more information. Furthermore, any treatments and finishes applied to the timber are environmentally assured to ensure the products can be recycled at the end of their life.

The load the column must withstand, your material preference and the project budget may influence which material we ultimately recommend to meet your requirements.

Please contact Customer Services on 01992 474600 or email [email protected] to discuss your requirements or for further information.

Brow

n

Dar

k Br

own

Dar

k G

rey

Gre

y

Ligh

t Bro

wn

Ligh

t Gre

y

Antiq

ue

Mah

ogan

y

Blac

k

Patin

a

Dar

k Br

own

Dar

k G

rey

Ligh

t Gre

y

Our timber columns are available in a range of colours:

Wood finishes Steel elements (powder coated)

Manhattan on 5m tapered wooden column Chester Station

6m C

urve

d sq

uare

woo

den

colu

mn

with

Ev

ora

5m T

aper

ed w

oode

n co

lum

n w

ith

Mila

no c

urve

d ar

m

4m In

vert

ed ta

per w

oode

n co

lum

n w

ith

Mila

no s

trai

ght a

rm

4m S

quar

e ta

per w

oode

n co

lum

n w

ith

Win

dsor

Str

eet (

with

spi

got p

late

)

5m P

aral

lel r

ound

woo

den

colu

mn

with

St

rand

B

4m S

quar

e ta

per w

oode

n co

lum

n w

ith

5m P

aral

lel r

ound

woo

den

colu

mn

with

St

rand

B




Special Columns

Special Columns

Bespoke 11m steel column Bankside, London

Our aluminium columns are made from 95% recycled material, are 100% recyclable and are carbon neutral through highly efficient manufacturing and a compensation scheme that funds a third-world sustainable project.

Please contact Customer Services on 01992 474600 or email [email protected] to discuss your requirements or for further information.

6m L

arge

cur

ved

colu

mn

with

Ev

ora

5m C

urve

d to

p co

lum

n w

ith

Evor

a

6m L

eani

ng c

olum

n w

ith

Mon

aro

6m L

eani

ng c

olum

n w

ith

Mon

aro



Pedestals & Feeder PillarsColumns, Brackets Pedestals & Feeder Pillars270

At DW Windsor we pride ourselves on finishing columns and brackets to the highest possible standards. The combination of our skilled workforce, state-of-the-art painting facilities and many years of experience allow us to achieve a paint finish that is unsurpassed in the industry.

Painting on site may be affected by the weather, temperature, humidity and inclusions in the paint before it dries (dust, insects etc). Any combination of these can cause problems with paint adhesion and thickness, giving a very poor finish and possible significant delays to the project.

The benefits of painting columns and brackets in a professional facility, where conditions are controlled and constant, are well known and more important today than ever.

All of our steel columns and brackets are galvanised to EN 1461 to ensure an extremely robust, protective coating of the material both inside and out. As a result of its application process, surface irregularities and “spikes” or drips of zinc may be present post-galvanising which our skilled engineers carefully address to remove or reduce without interfering with the integrity of the protection afforded by the galvanising.

The roots of our steel columns are finished in a glass-flake paint system which is both extremely hard and durable, ensuring the column root, the area most susceptible to corrosion, is given the best possible protection.

We offer two standard paint finishes in a wide range of colours: an acrylic system and a polysiloxane system. The former is a good balance between cost and robustness which will suit many applications, the polysiloxane is an incredibly hard wearing and tough paint that will retain its gloss level and colour for up to twenty-five years.

Ensuring quality to the last, all DW Windsor finished columns are protectively packaged prior to your delivery.

Painting Columns & Brackets




Columns Technical Details

• Tubular columns are generally manufactured in steel or aluminium

• Tapered columns are available in aluminium as well as steel

• All columns are available with root or flange plate

• Raising and lowering columns are available, including Oxford, plain and embellished columns See pages 274 – 275

• Columns with double door bases are available to order

• All Newcastle and Norwich columns and Chester, Cardiff, Oxford and Cambridge columns up to 6m mounting height are available with or without ladder bars

• Column brackets are manufactured with a male spigot as standard for mounting onto plain top columns. Other spigot arrangements available on request

• Columns and brackets are hot dip galvanised to EN ISO 1461. Please note that galvanising is an extremely robust industrial protective coating which, as a result of its application process, may leave some visible surface irregularities

• Columns can be supplied fully painted in any standard RAL colour and are offered in a choice of paint systems suited to standard applications or more aggressive environments such as industrial or coastal areas

• Column roots (steel columns) are treated with a glass flake paint system. See pages 270 – 271 for full information on painting columns and brackets

Specifying Light Source and Column HeightsWhen specifying a column, you only need to advise us of the height at which you require the light source for the desired lighting distribution and not the actual column height.

We will ensure that the chosen column and/or bracket are accurately configured to position the light source where it needs to be. This means that in most cases the actual column height will be different to the chosen height of the light source.

25

Ø22

208

250

C

B

A

D

E

Tubular Steel columns For other materials contact us

Flange Plate Details

Oxford and Cambridge columns up to 6m and all Norwich columns

800

Ø139

75

150

350

A

ØB

75

150

350

800

Ø139

75

150

350

A

ØB

75

150

350

Oxford and Cambridge columns up to 6m and all Norwich columns

Tubular Steel columns For other materials contact us

Nominal Column Height

Dimensions (mm)

A B C D E

4m 139 260 200 15 22 x 38 283pcd

5m 139 260 200 15 22 x 38 283pcd

6m 139 260 200 15 22 x 38 283pcd

8m 193 420 300 20 29 x 64 424pcd

10m 193 420 300 25 29 x 64 424pcd

Nominal Column Height

Dimensions (mm)

A B

5m 800 139

6m 1000 139

8m 1200 193

10m 1500 193

Evor

a sh

own

on T

ubul

ar S

teel

10m

col

umn

with

Lin

ear c

olum

n br

acke

t

Actu

al c

olum

n he

ight

Win

dsor

Stre

et s

how

n on

Oxf

ord

4m c

olum

n

Actu

al c

olum

n he

ight

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

10m

2m

6m

1m

Root Details

Monaro LED on 5m tapered aluminium column

Where underground obstructions cause a problem in positioning a column in the required location, bespoke, cranked and off-set roots are available which bolt to the column flange-plate




Raise & Lower Columns Raise & Lower Columns

New

cast

le h

inge

d 5m

col

umn

show

n w

ith S

trand

B lu

min

aire

Mid

-hin

ged

6m c

olum

n sh

own

with

DW

400

lum

inai

re

Oxfo

rd h

inge

d 5m

col

umn

show

n w

ith

Win

dsor

Stre

et lu

min

aire

5m

4m

3m

7m

8m

9m

2m

6m

1m

Mid-hinged columns

• Simple operation. No winch required

• Offset hinge means the column cannot tip accidentally

• Column door allows access to base compartment without the need to lower the column

• Tamper resistant external access to release the hinge mechanism

• Oxford column – the only heritage-style hinged-column on the market

Mid-hinged Raise and Lower Columns

A Simple Solution to Difficult AccessRaising & lowering columns enable maintenance to be carried out on luminaires used in areas where access to vehicles is not possible or allowable.

They are available in a range of loading capacities and designs to suit the weight of the luminaire or luminaire and bracket being carried as well as a wide range of styles from plain tubular columns through tapered columns and to embellished columns in a style appropriate to the lantern being carried. We can even offer our cast-based Oxford column; the only raising and lowering column of this type on the market.

We can offer essentially two types of hinged column: a base-hinged, winch operated version which has significant carrying capacity and a mid-hinged, rope operated version suitable for light loads and with the advantage that no winch-tool is required.

Generally, steel is used for raise and lower columns but we can also offer beautiful aluminium columns with almost invisible hinge mechanisms.

Please contact our Customer Services team on: 01992 474600 for further information.

Options

Mounting heights: Tubular & tapered: 5m, 6m & 8m Oxford: 4m, 5m & 6m Embellished columns: 5m & 6m

Embellished column styles: Amax Magna Volac Cannon Newcastle Chester Cardiff See pages 262 – 265 for illustrations of these columns

Mounting: Tubular & tapered: Root Oxford: Flange plate Embellished columns: Root

Colour: See Painting Columns & Brackets, pages 270 – 271

Other: Tubular & tapered: Flange plate available

Oxford & Cambridge: Fabricated root available

Embellished columns: Flange plate available

Technical Data

Mid-hinged columns can carry a maximum head load of 20kg with a maximum wind area of 0.3m2

Materials

Column: Tubular & tapered: Galvanised steel

Oxford & Cambridge: Ductile iron base with galvanised steel shaft

Embellished columns: Galvanised steel

Aluminium columns available on request

Finish: Tubular, tapered and embellished columns: Hot dip galvanised to EN ISO 1461 or to customer specification

Oxford & Cambridge: To customer specification

Evora on mid-hinged columns Archer Road, Stevenage




Column Enhancements

Banners, festive decorations, baskets and CCTV

Column Enhancements

Clamp-on Banner Arms

• Clamp-on, clean design and simple installation

• Single and double arm versions available

• Three sizes available, to fit 76mm, 114mm and 139mm Ø shafts

• The length of the arms is customisable

• Can be removed when not in use

• Can be transferred to a different column if required (e.g. if the column has been damaged)

• Supplied with fixing eyes as standard

Festive Decorations and Festoon Lighting

We are able to supply lighting columns purpose designed to incorporate festive decorations, with integrated electrical sockets for power supply.

Our columns can also be engineered to support catenary wires for festoon lighting.

Hanging Baskets

Basket arms are available permanently fixed to the column or as clamp-on attachments for seasonal or periodic use. They can be supplied with minimal detail or styled to blend with the luminaire bracket, and are suitable for both tubular and tapered columns.

Our clamp-on brackets enable baskets to be fitted to a range of tubular columns with ease.

As with our clamp-on banner arms, these are available as single or double units and are manufactured from galvanised steel and malleable iron for strength and longevity.

The arms may easily be removed when not required (during the winter months, for example) leaving the columns free of unnecessary clutter.

CCTV

We can supply heavy-duty lighting columns, both embellished and un-kitted, suitable for camera mounting. We also offer specially adapted luminaires for housing CCTV cameras.

Our luminaires offer high uniformity and low glare, making them exceptionally well suited to projects involving CCTV.

Banners

Our columns can be designed to carry a variety of custom-made or standard banner arms. Banners can be successfully incorporated into scheme designs to promote corporate branding, tourist attractions and high profile events.

Our clamp-on banner brackets enable banners to be fitted with ease to a range of tubular columns.

Available as single or double units, these subtly-styled products are manufactured from galvanised steel and malleable iron for strength and longevity.

The flexibility of the design allows the arms to be removed when not required (during the winter months, for example) leaving the columns free of unnecessary clutter.

We can also supply banner-arms for tapered or curved columns or where large banners are required, using an alternative system to our clamp-on arms.

B

ØC

ØA

Dimensions (mm)

A B C

48 Customisable 76, 114 & 139Rio with Gina bracket and banner arms on tapered column

Please contact Customer Services for more information on any of these products 01992 474600 or [email protected]




At DW Windsor we design, manufacture and paint our column and wall brackets in-house.

This gives us complete control of the entire process and ensures the products, whether standard or bespoke, are made to the high standards expected of DW Windsor.

Column Brackets

Our range of column brackets fully complement our luminaire styles.

• Column brackets are manufactured with a male spigot as standard for mounting onto plain top columns. Other spigot arrangements available on request

• Virtually all brackets are available for column and wall mounting

• Column brackets are available in 1, 2, 3 or 4 arm configurations

• Bracket projection dimensions are to the nearest 50mm

Projection Explained

The projection of a bracket is the horizontal distance between the centre of the column shaft or wall bracket mounting surface and the point at which the bracket enters the luminaire. As can be seen from the diagrams below, the distance from the centre of the column to the centre of the luminaire is quite different for side and top entry luminaires.

Heights of pedestals

Projection

Projection

Projection

Projection

Luminaire to Bracket Mounting

Brackets are available in the following mounting sizes:

Side entry: 42mm Ø

Post top entry: 76mm Ø

Top entry: Easy-fit™ (see page 100) provided as standard 1¼” or 1” BSP (dependent on product)

Column BracketsPedestals

Pier 80mm

York 200mm

250

Ø208

Ø22

201

Ø165

Ø18

215

Ø170

Ø12.5

200

Ø150

Ø10

Norwich 975mm

250

Ø208

Ø22

201

Ø165

Ø18

215

Ø170

Ø12.5

200

Ø150

Ø10

Norwich 150 1570mm

250

Ø208

Ø22

201

Ø165

Ø18

215

Ø170

Ø12.5

200

Ø150

Ø10

For locations where the luminaire needs to be positioned close to the mounting surface, we offer a range of decorative cast and fabricated pedestals. Used to best effect when mounting luminaires along walls, on gateposts or plinths, pedestals are available in a range of sizes and designs to complement most products.

All pedestals have a mounting diameter of 76mm.

Evora shown on 5m mid-hinged column and C1 column bracket Archers Road, StevenageCradle on Pier pedestal

250

Ø208

Ø22

201

Ø165

Ø18

215

Ø170

Ø12.5

200

Ø150

Ø10




Neva Side Entry

Linear (up to 150mm Projection) Side Entry

Akord DA Angled Entry: 30º

Linear Traditional Top Entry

Shaft Size (Ø) Available Projection (mm)

76 600, 850

89 600, 850

114 600, 850

139 600, 850


76 50, 150

89 50, 150

114 50, 150

139 50, 150


76 500, 750, 1000

89 500, 750, 1000

114 750, 1000, 1250

139 750, 1000, 1250


76 600

89 600

114 600, 850

139 600, 850


76 500, 750, 1000

89 500, 750, 1000

114 750, 1000, 1250

139 750, 1000, 1250


76 400, 650

89 400, 650

114 400, 650, 900

139 400, 650, 900


76 500, 750, 1000

89 500, 750, 1000

114 750, 1000, 1250

139 750, 1000, 1250


76 500, 750, 1000

89 500, 750, 1000

114 750, 1000, 1250

139 750, 1000, 1250


76 500

114 500•

Neva Post Top Post Top Entry

Linear Top Entry

Akord CC Top Entry

Maya Side Entry


76 1000

114 1000

Neva Top Entry

Linear (over 150mm Projection) Side Entry

Akord SA Side Entry

Linear Traditional Braced Top Entry


76 600, 900

89 600, 900

114 600, 900

139 600, 900


76 600, 900

89 600, 900

114 600, 900

139 600, 900

Chatham Top Entry


76 1000

114 1500

Tuscan Side Entry


76 600

114 1100

Gina Side Entry


76 600

89 600, 850, 1100

114 600, 850, 1100


76 750

114 750

Rio Maximum 2 arms only Side Entry

Linear Post Top Entry

Akord CB Angled Entry: 30º or 45º

Elegance Post Top Entry


76 650

89 650

114 650


76 750

114 750


76 550

89 550

•for Akord Cone C, 600 for Akord Cone A & B

Column Brackets

Not available as multi-arm column bracket Available as column bracket only

Evora C1 Side Entry


76 670

114 670

Evora C9 Side Entry


76 1000

114 1000

Evora C8 Side Entry


76 850

114 850

Evora C10 Side Entry


76 700

114 700

Akord CD Angled Entry: 30º or 45º


76 600

114 600

Column Brackets




Genus Side Entry

Inverted Genus Side Entry

Roco Side Entry


76 600

89 600

114 600, 850

139 600, 850, 1100


76 600

89 600

114 600, 850

139 600, 850, 1100


76 900

89 900

114 900

139 900


76 1000

89 1000

114 1000

139 1000


76 1000

89 1000

114 1000

139 1000


76 1000

89 1000

114 1000

139 1000


76 650

89 650

114 650, 900

139 650, 900


76 650

89 650

114 650, 900

139 650, 900


76 650

89 650

114 650, 900

Genus Traditional Top Entry

Inverted Genus Traditional Top Entry

Roco Traditional Top Entry

Genus Top Entry

Inverted Genus Top Entry

Roco Top Entry


76 650

89 650

114 650, 900

139 650, 900


76 650

89 650

114 650, 900

139 650, 900

Genus Post Top Entry

Inverted Genus Post Top Entry

Roco Post Top Entry


76 650

89 650

114 650, 900

Column Brackets

Teca Side Entry

Arc Scroll Top Entry

Ornate Post Top Entry


76 400

89 400

114 400, 650

139 400, 650


76 650, 850

89 650, 850, 1000

114 850, 1000, 1250

139 850, 1000, 1250


76 388

89 418


76 750, 1000

89 750, 1000, 1250

114 1000, 1250, 1500

139 1000, 1250, 1500


76 750, 1000

89 750, 1000, 1250

114 1000, 1250, 1500

139 1000, 1250, 1500


76 650, 850

89 650, 850, 1000

114 850, 1000, 1250

139 850, 1000, 1250

Shaft Size (Ø)

76

Shaft Size (Ø)

76

Teca Traditional Top Entry

Swan Neck Standard Top Entry

Scroll Traditional Top Entry

Teca Top Entry

Arc Ornate Top Entry

Hoop Traditional Top Entry


76 500

89 500

114 500, 750

139 500, 750


76 500

89 500

114 500, 750

139 500, 750


76 650, 850

89 650, 850, 1000

114 850, 1000, 1250

139 850, 1000, 1250

Arc Plain Top Entry

Swan Neck Iffley Top Entry

Inverted Hoop Traditional Top Entry


76 750, 1000

89 750, 1000, 1250

114 1000, 1250, 1500

139 1000, 1250, 1500

Not available as multi-arm column bracket Available as column bracket only

Column Brackets




Finials

Illuminated Drum Illuminated Spike

• Spike or drum finials to enhance many standard bracket and column arrangements

• Choice of illuminated or non-illuminated spike

• Illuminated finial available in a choice of colours: blue, white or RGB

Spike

Suitable for use with most column brackets

Options

Illuminated spike

Illuminated drum

Non-illuminated spike

Light source (illuminated) 3 x 1W LED; White Blue RGB

Gear: Integral driver

Materials

Body: Illuminated spike finial: GRP

Non-illuminated spike finial: Cast aluminium

Drum finial: Acryl satine

Dimensions: Illuminated spike finial: 1000mm tall x 76mm Ø

Non-illuminated spike finial: 1000mm tall x 76mm Ø or 89mm Ø

Drum finial: 100mm tall x 90mm Ø

In order to provide you with more freedom in selecting the ideal bracket design for your scheme, we offer a number of optional finials.

Edge Lane, Liverpool




A

B D

C

Ø12

Wall Brackets Wall Brackets

Cable entry may be effected from top or bottom and offers loop-in loop-out facility

Wall Box Bracket™

DW Windsor’s Wall Box Bracket™ is designed to bring practicality and flexibility to wall mounted luminaires. Its deep box design can accommodate a wide range of electrical components to enhance the function of the luminaire, whilst making installation and maintenance exceptionally easy.

The Wall Box Bracket™ can accommodate standard cut-outs and other electrical components such as control gear and time clocks. Batteries and electronic modules which may not be suited to mounting in the luminaire can also be housed, making the Wall Box eminently suited to luminaires used for emergency lighting. It is especially valuable where aesthetics or conservation criteria restrict the mounting of separate terminal boxes.

Constructed from steel, the Wall Box Bracket™ design is extremely versatile, with top and bottom cable entry facilities and compatibility with all bracket styles and entry types. We also offer alternative fixings for telegraph poles or wall corners. Galvanised and painted as standard, the Wall Box Bracket™ can be supplied in any of our standard RAL colours.

Sealed to IP55, the interior of the Wall Box Bracket™ is accessed via tri-head screw fixings. A retaining strap prevents the front plate from swinging open too far, thus avoiding damage to the luminaire against the wall, whilst allowing full access to the box for maintenance.

A B C D

Medium 300 380 150 500

Large 400 640 210 760

A B

Standard Unit 505 340

Long Unit• 605 440

Maximum Internal depth 85mm

•required for certain bracket styles

Wall Channel Brackets

The popular DW Windsor Wall Channel Bracket provides an attractive, low-profile and extremely stable solution where mounting a luminaire to a wall is required. Its two-part channel allows the rear element to be mechanically secured to the wall and electrical connection made before the more substantial front element and luminaire is attached, securely held by multiple fasteners.

Cabling enters the bracket through a gland to the underside or via a rear cable-hole.

This versatile bracket can be mounted on flat walls or, when specified, on external right-angle corners of buildings or onto circular surfaces such as telegraph poles.

The Wall Channel Bracket is supplied galvanised and finished in any of our standard RAL colours.

Cast Wall Brackets

Cast brackets have the facility for a terminal block and are finished polyester powder coated as standard.

275

450

Ø8.5

310

275

450

Ø8.5

310

313

450

Ø8.5

345

400

438

Ø8.5

445

58

Ø10.5

Ø22

85

Projection

Projection

Ø76

Ø76

Ø76

152

A B

300

A

B D

C

Ø12

Ø12

1�2��B�P

40070

70

70

70

275

450

Ø8.5

310

1/2” BSP70

275

450

Ø8.5

310

275

450

Ø8.5

310

313

450

Ø8.5

345

400

438

Ø8.5

445

58

Ø10.5

Ø22

85

Projection

Projection

Ø76

Ø76

Ø76

152

A B

300

A

B D

C

Ø12

Ø12

1�2��B�P

40070

70

70

70

Large Ornate

Large Ornate Pendant

Large Plain Cast

Strand on Hoop Traditional wall channel bracket

152

A B

300

Ø12

400




Feeder PillarsFeeder Pillars

Accessories

FP JU1 FR Juno 1 feeder pillar fabricated root, galvanised finish






FP KOR FR Kora feeder pillar fabricated root

Juno Feeder pillars may be supplied complete with electrical equipment or empty (without backboard).

Non-standard versions (eg different heights or door sizes) are available to special order.

Please contact Customer Services with your requirements or enquiry on 01992 474600 or email [email protected]

Equipment shown in the feeder pillars is for illustration purposes only and not supplied as standard

Juno 4 Juno 5

Juno Feeder Pillars

Juno 6

150

250

1000

Kora

Kora Feeder Pillar

Juno 1 Juno 2 Juno 3

Product Codes

* For other finishes, replace 10 with the appropriate finish code

Material & Finish

Brushed stainless steel

Stainless steel painted RAL 9017

Galvanised steel painted RAL 9017

Juno 1

FP J1H B462 o

FP J1H B310 o

Juno 2

FP J2H B462 o

FP J2H B310 o

Juno 3

FP J3H B462 o

FP J3H B310 o

Juno 4

FP J4H B462 o

FP J4H B310 o

Juno 5

FP J5H B462 o

FP J5H B310 o

Juno 6

FP J6H B462 o

FP J6H B310 o

Kora

FP KOR B462 o

FP KOR B410 o

RAL

9016

40 10 20 21

RAL

9005

RAL

7016

RAL

7037

DB

DB

703

This product is available in the colours listed, with other colours available to special order. See inside front cover flap for further details.

Juno Feeder Pillar St Martins Quarter, Worcester

Options

Juno Supplied with hinged door(s) and flange plate

Kora Supplied with removable door and flange plate

Colours: Stainless steel (brushed, grade 304) See standard colours below Other RAL colours available on request

Other: Stainless steel grade 316 available on request

Bolt-on roots are available, made from galvanised steel

Available with electrical accessories. Please contact Customer Services for more information

Materials

Juno: Stainless steel (in a brushed and passivated finish)

Galvanised steel (finished in any standard RAL)

Kora: Stainless steel (grade 304)

Weight

Juno 1 & 2: 20kg Juno 3: 31kg Juno 4 & 5: 64kg Juno 6: 81kg Kora: 16kg

Ø170

1000

Ø240

Ø170

1000

Ø240

1000

Ø300

Ø220

400

600

1300

Ø325

Ø420

1000

Ø325

Ø420

1000

Ø325

Ø420




A Guide to Lighting Column Design

Background and References

BS EN 40: Parts 1 to 7 is the harmonised European standard for lighting columns which superseded BS 5649: Parts 1 to 9, the British Standard that was previously used. BS EN 40 is a more complicated design standard than BS 5649 and so BSI have produced a document – PD 6547: 2004 + A1:2009 ‘Guidance notes on the use of BS EN 40-3-1 and BS EN 40-3-3’ also termed the National Application Document (NAD). This gives guidance on the information the specifier is required to give to the manufacturer to allow a suitable lighting column to be designed. BD94/07, Design of Minor Structures, incorporates the provisions of BS EN 40 and BS EN 12899 and is required for reference in certain circumstances. It is recommended reading.

Information Required

To design a lighting column to be structurally satisfactory requires the following information from the specifier:

• The equipment the column must carry

• �The acceptable performance of the column and its materials

• Site data to determine the maximum wind force the column is likely to experience

Equipment

The weight, windage area (i.e. the maximum area in the vertical plane) and position on the column – both height and offset – of all the equipment the column has to carry including luminaires, brackets, and for example signs, banners, hanging baskets, festive decorations etc.

Standard road signs are classified as A, B and C, as indicated in the table reproduced from PD 6547.

Performance

Horizontal deflection: EN 40 gives three allowable limits – classes 1 – 3. PD 6547 proposes only Class 3 for the UK unless otherwise specified. Class 3 = 0.10 (h+w) where h = column height and w = bracket projection.

Partial load factors: Of the two classes in EN 40, PD 6547 recommends Class B.

Foundation: If data is required, specify the soil type (good/average/poor). Table 2 of PD 6547 relates and covers aspects such as compaction and drainage. See table below.

Fatigue: Requirements not covered by EN 40 but may be considered for metal columns above 9m in height. See also BD 94/07.

Site Data

a) To design a column for a specific site: (when appropriate this will give the most economical column design). This information allows the highest wind pressure to be calculated which the column is likely to experience in a specified period – usually 25 years.

Maximum wind velocity at the site – 10 minute mean wind velocity – this is the reference wind velocity that is likely to occur in the specified period (e.g. 25 years). This can be derived from the mean hourly wind speed at sea level published in BS EN 1991 for the area in which the site is located. As it is referenced to sea level it requires adjustment to the altitude at which the column will be installed.

Site altitude (Above sea level) – altitude affects the wind velocity (see above).

Topography factor – This should be taken as ‘1’ except in cases where, for example, a road is carried on an embankment of height greater than 5 metres above the surrounding area or columns on a slope greater than 1 in 20. In these cases specialist advice must be sought as the resultant wind load can be considerably increased.

Terrain category – Categorises the degree to which the ground around the site is open or obstructed, as hedges, buildings etc. reduce the wind speed. The table below is reproduced from BS EN 40-3-1: 2000.

b) To design a column for use across an Administrative Area: (When standard column designs are appropriate for use with specified maximum luminaire, bracket and signage sizes and weights) – Administrative Authorities can select a single wind velocity, maximum altitude, terrain category etc. to be used in specifications that cover the majority of lighting column locations within their boundaries. The combination of these leads to a single maximum wind pressure for the particular administrative area. PD 6547 – Annex A Table A.1 – lists these wind velocities and maximum altitudes together with factors representing the pressure – the Rationalised Wind Loading Factor (in N/m2). There are five of these also classified as “Rationalised wind loading regions” – Extra Heavy, Heavy, Medium, Light and Extra Light.

Authorities that border the coast are likely to adopt columns for the costal terrain category at the limiting site altitude for the whole authority.

Topography factor and Terrain category are still required – see Ground Factor G table opposite.

c) Unusual locations: The above applies to normal locations. If columns are in unusual locations – e.g. mounted on bridges or tall structures, at an altitude above 250m, on a coastal or exposed site, then this needs to be notified since specialist advice will be required.

Information required Suggestion Source

EquipmentWeight, wind area and position of: Luminaire, bracket Supplier

Banner, baskets, festive decorations etc. Supplier

Signs Class A, B or C PD 6547 Table 3

PerformanceDeflection Class 3 PD 6547 cl 5.3

Partial safety factors on loads Class B PD 6547 cl 5.2

Foundation soil conditions Good/Average/PoorPD 6547Table 2 & Site assessment

Fatigue – only if specified If over 9mEN 40-3-3 cl 8 Annex A BD 26/04

Site data – For site-specific designWind speed – mean hourly or 10 minute 25 year return BS 6399: Part 2

Altitude Map

Alternatively for Administrative AreaRationalised wind loading factor PD 6547

Table A1

Topography factor unless otherwise specified 1 PD 6547 3.1

Terrain category unless otherwise specified II > 8m, III <8m PD 6547 3.3.1

Special site location or conditions Specify Specifier

EN 40 Column Standard

The requirements of lighting column design have always been complex and many have found it a challenge to fully understand them.

To help specifiers gain a little understanding of EN 40, we have taken the opportunity to explain the main points of this standard and also offer a simple guide to the information required from the specifier to ensure lighting columns can be manufactured to a structurally sound design.

Notes: The most onerous orientation of the sign should be assumed. Unless stated the sign is assumed to have a mass of 5kg

Sign class Area of sign Height to centre of sign Sign shape Offset

A 0.3m2 2.5m Square 0.3m

B 0.6m2 2.5m Square 0.3m

C 1.0m2 2.5m Square 0.3m

PD 6547 Standard Road Sign ClassificationsTable 3 – Road sign class

Specification Checklist

EN 40 Column Standard

Ground Factor G and Soil Impact Factor ksi

Quality of soil G (kN/m2 per m)

Soil Impact Factor ksi

Good: Compact, well-graded sand and gravel, hard clay, well-graded fine and course sand, decomposed granite rock and soil. Good soils drain well.

630 0.2

Average: Compact fine sand, medium clay, compact well drained sandy loam, loose coarse sand and gravels. Average soils drain sufficiently well that water does not stand on the surface.

390 0.3

Poor: Soft clay, clay loam, poorly compacted sand, clays containing a large amount of silt and vegetable matter, and made-up ground.

230 0.5

Where the quality is unknown, it shall be taken as Poor. Extract from BD 94/07

Category Description

I Rough open sea, lakeshore with at least 5km fetch upwind. Smooth flat country without obstacles

II Farmland with boundary hedges, occasional small farm structures, houses or trees

III Suburban or industrial areas and permanent forests

IV Urban areas in which at least 15% of the surface is covered with buildings and their average height exceeds 15m

Notes: Unless specified, use category III for columns below 8m, and category II for columns of 8m and above

BS EN 40-3-1: 2000 Terrain Categories

Milano straight arms Derby Train Station

How-to Guides

Through the following pages we have brought together some inspiration and considerations required when lighting various external environments: how to achieve the desired effect, what areas need particular attention and any regulations that have to be taken into account. There are many ways to create an effect or provide lighting that is efficient and effective without compromise to the environment being lit.

Particular emphasis has been given to road and car park lighting, where high demands are made of the lighting in order to offer safe, well-lit areas. We also offer a wealth of experience on working with heritage sites and wildlife.

Whilst every care has been taken to present the most up-to-date information, latest updates are available via our website: www.dwwindsor.com

Sharing our knowledge

Lighting Landscapes, the Vertical and using In-ground Luminaires294 – 295

Lighting Façades, Statues and Monuments296 – 297

Lighting Pedestrian Crossings298 – 301

Lighting Car Parks302 – 303

Minimising Light Spill304 – 305

Wildlife Considerations306 – 307

How to create an effect without

compromising the environment

How-to Guides 293


Other helpful guides

White Light18 – 23

Control & Dim24 – 25

LED Light Engine32 – 33

LX1 Luminance Optic34 – 35

Unique Solutions36 – 37

Refurbishment & Replicas38 – 39

Solar & Wind Powered Lighting152 – 157

How to Illuminate Areas using Garda LED Handrail220 – 221

EN 40 Column Standard290 – 291


How-to Guides 295294 How-to Guides

Capra and Petra Q8 Quorum Business Park, Newcastle

Lighting Landscapes, the Vertical and using In-ground Luminaires

Lighting the VerticalWhen lighting our roads, streets and other exterior areas we generally consider how much light we put on the horizontal plane and its uniformity. In areas where there are pedestrians, the vertical surfaces – buildings, monuments and trees are often a major part of the visual scene.

General lighting will often need supplementing to ensure these surfaces are well lit to create an interesting night time scene. This can take a number of forms, including floodlights, ground recessed luminaires or wall mounted lighting. Care should be taken to control this light, avoiding glare and light spill into the sky.

Lighting LandscapesGardens and landscaped areas are increasingly being illuminated, both for personal safety and as a visual amenity.

The key to successful landscape lighting is subtlety and selectivity. In most cases there will be little competing light, so fairly low light levels will have considerable visual impact.

Consider light pollution and unnecessary energy usage. Can elements of the lighting scheme be switched off at certain times of night or year? For example, deciduous trees may not benefit from up-lighting in the winter.

Avoid trying to light landscapes in an all-over, uniform manner. Best results are often achieved by the selective highlighting of key objects within areas of darkness.

Always consider the main pedestrian routes or viewing positions – light to enhance those views.

For landscapes with a major viewing position, try to illuminate a prominent or distant object – a fountain, sculpture or tree – to create a central lit focus to the scene.

With smaller landscaped spaces, gentle lighting of the visible boundaries, such as walls or fences, can help create a greater sense of intimacy and comfort.

Mounting luminaires in close offset positions with the light grazing the surface will help to bring out the interesting textures of natural surfaces, such as tree-trunks and stone walls.

The surfaces of ponds or lakes make excellent mirrors – try to exploit their reflective potential by lighting objects along their edge, giving you ‘double’ the lighting effect.

The lighting of pathways needs careful consideration. Lower level lighting such as bollards or marker lights may be less intrusive aesthetically than column-mounted luminaires.

Always ensure that lighting equipment is concealed as much as possible.

Using Ground Recessed LuminairesEnsure the installer positions the sleeve and luminaire in the correct orientation otherwise the beam may not point in the right direction: even slightly misaligned luminaires can ruin the desired effect. Final positioning is often best achieved at night whilst the luminaires are illuminated.

Close offset positions on large trees can be difficult. Locate the luminaire without cutting through large roots, as this could kill the tree.

Due consideration should be given to surface glass temperatures – select a luminaire and lamp combination that offers an acceptable temperature for the intended application.

IP67 ground recessed luminaires must not be installed in a hollow where water can stand. Correct installation, with adequate drainage around and below the luminaire is crucial.

Crayford Waterside, Kent Vertica, Lyra and Light Point, St Martin’s Quarter, Worcester



Monza Luton Hoo Hotel, Bedfordshire

Lighting Façades, Statues and Monuments

Lighting Statues and MonumentsMany monuments are listed, therefore lighting will require planning approval from the local Conservation Officer or English Heritage.

With small statues, it is possible to achieve an effective result with a single fitting, but this should have a narrow-beam and preferably be located above and to one side of the object. This will help to create strong, dramatic shadowing and avoid glare to passers-by.

Larger statues or monuments will invariably require more than one luminaire – these should be used to reveal different parts of the object, but be careful not to cancel out the shadows from one fitting by another. The impact of a carefully illuminated statue is often defined by the creative use of shadows.

Brightness is a key issue – floods or spots that are too powerful will bleach out the statue’s details. In most cases, it is useful to do a trial or mock-up, using different wattages, beam angles and positions.

Think about the main viewing positions and concentrate on lighting to mainly enhance that view.

Consider spill light around and behind the object being lit – the use of narrow-beam equipment, shields, baffles and lighting from high positions will help to reduce this.

With monuments on plinths, don’t only light the statue itself – try to put a gentle wash of light onto the plinth as well.

Consider the daytime appearance of the lighting equipment – ground lights are a good solution for minimising the daytime visual impact.

Computer generated renderings are an ideal first step, provided that appropriate software such as 3D Studio Max is used to generate sufficiently realistic and photometrically accurate images.

Lighting FaçadesLighting at an angle to the normal viewing direction can create a subtle, yet effective shadowing, or ‘modelling’ effect on the texture of a surface.

Be careful to choose a lamp with colour characteristics sympathetic to the building materials. There are many light sources to choose from including LEDs, white SON and metal halides.

Generally use narrow and medium beam spreads to create interest. Wide beams can flood the facade and lose impact.

Ensure luminaires are sited and shielded to avoid glare to the viewer and the building occupants, and conceal them from view during the day. Use louvres or visors for example to minimise light spill beyond the facade and into the night sky.

Be wary of using excessive lighting on the surface; if the luminance level is too high it could be deemed as obtrusive lighting. See the ILP’s ‘Guidance Notes for the Reduction of Obtrusive Light’ for assistance.

Monza and Light Point, Hull University

Vaio, Unite Building, Liverpool




However, if this is not the case and a decision is made to light the crossing, then there are three main principle issues to consider

• Ensuring the crossing is highly visible and distinguishable from the surrounding areas

• Clear visibility of pedestrians approaching and using the crossing

• Minimising glare to drivers

In order to achieve these objectives an appropriate form of supplementary lighting is required.

To ensure that the approaching motorist clearly sees where pedestrians are crossing, the lighting must generate an illuminated area over the crossing surface, with clearly defined edges. Consider also the area beyond the crossing from the driver’s perspective. The approaches to the crossing marked by zig-zag lines – the controlled area – and the adjacent footways should also be adequately lit; this may be to the appropriate lighting class. Where the road is lit to a road lighting classification then the pavements by the controlled area should be lit to the appropriate equivalent S class. For more information on comparative lighting classes see pages 310 – 311.

A low mounting height of no more than 4 metres and often around 2.5 metres is usually most suitable to create this defined crossing area. Furthermore, a different lamp colour from the surrounding road lighting is effective in helping highlight the carpet, for example white light on the crossing in a high pressure sodium (SON) road installation.

Luminaires need to be as glare free as possible to ensure maximum visibility through the crossing area, as pedestrians will often try to cross short of the crossing itself. Flat glass luminaires are therefore best.

Finally, the light distribution from the luminaire needs to provide high levels of vertical illuminance onto the crossing pedestrians, to ensure that they are visible to approaching motorists. Guidance recommends three separate vertical calculation planes, covering the width of the crossing, are used to ensure good visibility of the pedestrian is maintained throughout.

The benefits of our Zebra crossing luminaires

DW Windsor Zebra luminaires are available in a variety of styles in order to match the aesthetics of luminaires used elsewhere on the scheme. Furthermore, we can also supply every element required for a complete pedestrian crossing solution. To minimise installation cost and street clutter, position the Zebra luminaire on the same column as the Belisha beacon.

These guidance parameters (explored in more depth in the ILP publication TR12) mean that the ideal pedestrian crossing luminaire will distribute most of its light in a concentrated pattern forward of the luminaire. This will ensure that the complete height of the pedestrian is illuminated.

DW Windsor Zebra Floods offer this ideal distribution and are therefore highly suitable for this application.

Reference material

Please refer to the following publications for the full requirements of lighting pedestrian crossings:

BS EN 13201-2: 2003 Road Lighting Part 2: Performance requirements, Annex B

BS 5489-1: 2003 Code of practice for the design of road lighting Part 1: Lighting of roads and public amenity areas Paragraphs 11.5, E.2.4, E.3.3

CEN/TR13201-1:2004 Paragraph 5.3.9

ILP (Institution of Lighting Professionals) Technical Report Number 12 “Lighting of Pedestrian Crossings”

New universal Zebra Flood Optic is suitable for both one and two-way traffic

Monaro LED AMRC Building, Sheffield

It is not always necessary to separately illuminate pedestrian crossings, for example, if the street is well lit and pedestrians are clearly visible to motorists.



Windsor Zebra West Wycombe, Buckinghamshire


Precise light control

The DW Windsor ‘flood’ optical system aims to provide the lighting control needed for the localised lighting of pedestrian crossings.

The Zebra Flood optic is available in a number of luminaire styles, so continuity can be achieved with the rest of your lighting scheme.

Complete service

As part of our standard service we can supply the complete Zebra Crossing package.

This covers everything from the specially designed luminaire, Belisha beacons with flasher unit and supporting brackets, to fully painted columns complete with black and white bands.

In addition, our Applications Team can undertake the lighting scheme design for you, so you can be sure your pedestrian crossing is lit to meet the required standards.

Contact [email protected]

Zebra product ranges

Colada Zebra Pages 248 – 249

Ely Zebra Pages 124 – 125

Monaro Zebra Pages 56 – 57

Windsor Zebra Pages 110 – 111

Optima Range Zebra Pages 92 – 101

Strand Zebra Pages 120 – 123

Equipment required

For a standard two lane carriageway, two Zebra luminaires are required for each crossing, positioned on opposite sides of the road between the oncoming traffic and the crossing.

DW Windsor can supply every element required for pedestrian crossing lighting:

Luminaire

Column

Belisha beacons with flasher unit and supporting brackets

Painting of black & white bands

1

2

3

4



Car parks are primarily illuminated to provide a clear, way-finding environment for their users, and to encourage a feeling of safety and security.

Utilising the correct equipment and lighting levels, a car park can provide a welcoming environment which helps to encourage higher levels of usage.

Lighting Car Parks

In order to provide a well-lit car park, the following steps should be considered during the design stage:

Lighting

Lighting levels for car parks are clearly defined within the British Standards and aim to provide a good quality of light, uniformly applied to the desired area.

The versatile DW Windsor Diamond Optic®, with its adjustable optical distribution (see pages 28 – 31) is a useful tool for achieving the optimum lighting coverage with the minimum number of fittings.

Luminaires with flat glass glazing are generally preferable to further reduce glare and upward light.

If a building has a dedicated architectural lighting scheme, then it is important that the car park lighting complements this effect.

In order to provide clear images to potential CCTV systems, the lamp choice should provide a good colour rendering of 60Ra or above.

Products such as high wattage, wide-beam floodlights mounted on columns or buildings should be avoided, as this approach could cause glare to users and create unnecessary light spill onto adjacent areas.

Control

A car park often fluctuates in the amount of traffic usage it receives, which is a major factor in choosing an appropriate lighting level (see table).

The usage of dimming regimes or occupancy control sensors should be considered to reduce the lighting levels during periods of reduced traffic usage.

Controls can be used to reduce the intensity of the lighting to a lower level whilst ensuring uniformity levels still provide good way-finding and CCTV coverage for the car park and associated areas.

Further information on lighting control options and their benefits can be found on pages 24 – 25.

Location

The location of lighting columns within a car park may impact on various different factors, such as the overall car park layout, and therefore should be taken into account early during the design process.

Ideally, columns should be situated in areas to maximise the number of parking bays available without creating unnecessary obstructions.

The location of items such as parking meters, CCTV equipment or signage should be considered in areas where the lighting can positively affect their use.

Always try to use the minimum number of lighting points to achieve the required illuminance and uniformity in order to reduce both clutter and cost to the scheme.

ProtectionColumns can be subject to vehicle damage, so ensure that they are located in areas less likely to encounter vehicular movement.

Where columns are located close to traffic routes, bollards or rail systems can be used protect the base area from any impact.

Lighting levels

The following table provides information from Table 5 of BS 5489:2003 for the lighting of outdoor car parks.

Model Outdoor Car Parksrecommended lighting levels Average Illuminance (Eav) Uniformity

Light Traffic car parks (i.e. shops, apartments, cycle parks etc) ≥ 5 lux ≥ 25%

Medium Traffic car parks (i.e. department stores, offices, sports facilities etc) tyle ≥ 10 lux ≥ 25%

Heavy Traffic car parks (i.e. schools, churches, major sports facilities etc) ≥ 20 lux ≥ 25%

Monaro, AMRC Building, Sheffield

Monaro AMRC Building Sheffield



DW400 using Diamond Optic®to ensure a controlled cut-off Cribbs Causeway, Bristol

Camaro has a sharp backward cut-off to prevent light spill into nearby houses Freshbrook Way, Swindon

Minimising Light Spill

Download and follow the guideline document ‘Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light’, published by the Institution of Lighting Professionals.

Obtrusive light shields

Our Diamond Optic® is designed to minimise light spill by utilising a variable reflector system in order to tailor the light distribution to the areas being lit. For further information about this technology, see pages 28 – 31 where full details are available.

There are, however, some applications where luminaires are placed in close proximity to windows or areas where light shields may be desirable to minimise the effect of light nuisance.

The unique design of Diamond Optic® allows these shields to be fitted within the bowl of the luminaire, ensuring that they are as discreet as possible.

A range of obtrusive light shields are available in the following configurations, dependant on luminaire and glazing choice:

• Universal OLS – 30°cut-off

• Medium OLS – 45° cut-off

• Full OLS – 60° cut-off

The Universal and Medium obtrusive light shields are attached to the optic tray using magnetic strips which allows either factory-fitting or on-site installation solutions. If required, they can also be easily adjusted to fine-tune the lighting control.

The Full obtrusive light shield is mechanically fixed within the luminaire to ensure complete light cut-off can be achieved.

Obtrusive light shields can be fitted to control light in any direction from the luminaire if required.

For full details on the correct configuration required, contact [email protected]

This document considers the use of part night switching or dimming regime. Significant energy savings can be achieved using this method. Incorporating central management systems allows the project further controllability, with the potential of reducing lighting to a more appropriate level after installation. See pages 24 – 25 for details on DW Windsor control options or ILP Technical Report 27 for in-depth guidance on variable lighting levels.

Specify well designed lighting equipment with accurate and efficient photometric performance. Good quality products should have the ability to retrofit appropriate shields, baffles or louvres.

Remember long light paths at shallow angles above the horizontal contribute most to sky glow and should be avoided.

For architectural lighting close offset uplighting techniques, with higher numbers of lower powered luminaires will engender fewer problems than higher powered products with greater range.

Consider down-lighting as a viable alternative to up-lighting.

During and after installation, ensure that the equipment has been installed and functions as required. Night-time inspection is particularly effective, as stray light becomes visible and areas which may be over or under lit can be experienced better in real time.

The problem of light pollution is well known. The emotive issue has continued to grow in intensity in the ensuing years, with current estimates indicating that as much as £100 million per annum in wasted energy is to blame.

There are three main aspects of light pollution:

Sky glow

Upwards light, either direct or reflected, that is scattered in our atmosphere to become a background luminance that can obliterate visibility of all but the brightest celestial objects. Light emitted at angles just above the horizontal is the main concern, as this can cause sky glow problems many tens of miles away from the source itself. See the Institution of Lighting Professionals publication ‘Towards Understanding Skyglow’, co-authored by Radio Astronomer Dr. Chris Baddiley and our Environmental Strategy Manager, Tom Webster for further details.

Glare

Often associated with light trespass, the discomfort or impairment of vision experienced when the brightness of a light source is excessive in relation to the general surroundings, detrimentally affecting one’s ability to undertake a given visual task.

Light nuisance

Light falling outside the area, building or monument being illuminated, onto other areas, so as to cause a nuisance. The Clean Neighbourhoods and Environment Act 2005 (CNE) has made it illegal to put light from one premises onto another if it is undesired. The crucial clause, 102, specifically targets light that is either injurious to health or is a nuisance. Whilst there are specifically named exceptions, many lighting schemes fall within the scope of this legislation and knowledge of its far reaching powers is of paramount importance.

Strand Poundbury, Dorset


How-to Guides 307306 How-to GuidesMonaro LED Gravel Pit Lane, Greenwich

Wildlife Considerations

Some considerations are already taken care of in legislation such as the WEEE directive (pages 312 – 313) to ensure that the product is taken care of responsibly at the end of its life. But what about deploying the product responsibly throughout its service life?

The key fact to remember here is that by its very nature lighting modifies the night time environment. The key questions are: to what extent does this modification affect the natural World; and what can I do about it?

Impact

So much is known about the impact lighting has on the natural environment that this section can only be a very brief roundup of some of the more common issues.

Plants

All plants respond to light. Some require long periods of darkness, some short periods of darkness to germinate. Some plants are impervious to this effect. This is known as long day, short day and day neutral plants. Research into any given species of plant will reveal which type it is. It is currently unknown as to the long term effects of artificial light on this process.

Some plants (such as the London plane tree) retain leaves well into autumn if artificial lighting is present. If there are severe frosts whilst the tree still has leaves the ability for the leaf bearing twig to regenerate leaves the following year is compromised. The fear is that severe early winters will see the wholesale death of these trees. However, since widespread adoption of street lighting there have not yet been the type of winters that would cause this in England. With the changes we are currently experiencing in our climate this may change in the future.

Birds

Some species are known to stay active under artificial light (blackbirds and robins particularly). So far no detrimental link has been shown to result from this activity, especially when compared to the detrimental effects of daytime noise.

Kestrels, a daytime raptor, have been seen to hunt pipistrelle bats at night near artificial light sources. Their effect on the overall bat population is currently unknown.

Bats

Some bats, in particular the abundant pipistrelle go to a light because of the abundance of insects attracted by that light.

Some bats actively avoid light. For example the rare horseshoe bats only hunt in the darkest areas. If the insects have been attracted away this means their hunting grounds are denuded of prey. Although it is unknown to what extent this affects the overall numbers, studies in Switzerland have shown previously unlit areas changing from a predominantly horseshoe bat populated area to a predominantly pipistrelle populated area.

Daubenton’s bats use rivers as highways and bridges with their undersides illuminated are perceived as a barrier and will not be flown under.

Horseshoe bats use hedgerows as highways. If one side of the hedge is lit, they will cross over to the unlit side if the opportunity exists.

Most bats will delay emergence from their roosts if the entrance is lit. This has been shown to be detrimental to their existence but the degree of impact is currently not researched.

Insects

Insects are drawn predominantly to light with a high UV or blue content. Initial evidence suggests that this is having a detrimental impact on insect populations, especially some of the rarer breeds of moth.

Steps an environmentally aware lighting designer/specifier should undertake

The lack of empirical environmental impact data is a real handicap here and this is not likely to change within the foreseeable future.

Step 1

If the lighting scheme is likely to have a high impact on the natural environment, for example high lighting levels in an area in which wildlife is known to inhabit, advice should be sought from local experts in the relevant field. Your local bat expert can be sourced via www.bats.org.uk

Step 2

The higher the perceived environmental impact, the more mitigating techniques and technologies need to be used.

Mitigating techniques and technologies

1. Consider the lighting task

For most lighting design, the first recourses are the lighting values laid down in the tables from the various guides and codes of practice. Sometimes the lighting task can be achieved in other ways. For example using low level directional lighting such as the DW Windsor Garda illuminated handrail (see pages 214 – 221).

2. (Don’t) see the light

Clever use of reflector technologies, shielding and directional sources such as LEDs can all but eliminate light from undesired directions.

3. Attract the right night-time activity

Remember light emitted towards the blue end of the spectrum, and especially those sources that emit UV are automatically going to have a greater detrimental effect than those at the opposite end of the spectrum.

DW Windsor has a wealth of experience in this area having worked in collaboration with the Bat Conservation Trust and the ILP to publish the guide: Bats and Lighting in the UK, a free copy of which is available from the ILP: www.theilp.org.uk

An extract from a lecture given by our Environmental Strategy Manager, Tom Webster

When designing a lighting scheme there are many considerations and for some of these the impact the lighting has on wildlife is of particular importance.

Garda LED gives a sharp cut-off, which prevents disturbance to the flight-path of bats. Lea Bridge Towpath, Hackney

Meeting design standards

This section offers a reference guide to many of the regulations and other considerations required when specifying exterior lighting. Particular emphasis has been given to road and car park lighting, where high demands are made in order to provide safe, well-lit areas.

Whilst every care has been taken to present up-to-date information, correct at time of print, please refer to our website for latest updates: www.dwwindsor.com

CEN Code of Practice310 – 311

WEEE Directive312

Energy Related Products312

Ingress Protection & Shock Resistance313

Lamp Data314 – 315

Glossary316 – 317

Index318 – 319

General Conditions of Trading320

A reference guide to regulations

and other considerations

Technical Information


Technical Information 309

Other helpful sections

How-to Guides292 – 307

White Light18 – 24

Control & Dim25 – 27


Technical Information 311310 Technical Information

Criteria for selection of S-Classes Lighting classes for subsidiary roads – residential roads, footpaths and cycleways

1 Please refer to your local Police Architectural Liaison Officer (ALO) for assistance. See securedbydesign.com2 Low Traffic Flow is where traffic is solely associated with the adjacent property e.g. a cul-de-sac3 Normal Traffic Flow is typically found on housing estate access roads and where there may be shops, pubs etc.4 High Traffic Flow is as above but with greater usage such as a housing estate spine road

Crime Rate1 Ra Value

Lighting Class

Low Traffic Flow2 Normal Traffic Flow3 High Traffic Flow4

E1/E2 E3/E4 E1/E2 E3/E4 E1/E2 E3/E4

LowRa < 60 S5 S4 S4 S3 S3 S2

Ra ≥ 60 S6 S5 S5 S4 S4 S3

ModerateRa < 60 S4 S3 S3 S2 – S1

Ra ≥ 60 S5 S4 S4 S3 – S2

HighRa < 60 S2 S2 S2 S1 – S1

Ra ≥ 60 S3 S3 S3 S2 – S2

BS 5489-1 & BS EN 13201-2: 2003.

The information on these pages is intended only as a handy reference to the two standards and should not be used as a substitute to the full code of practice. Please note that at time of going to press a new British Standard is being drafted that is likely to change the criteria for each class.

Please refer to our website for the most up-to-date information available: www.dwwindsor.comThe above table shows that the range of average values permissible within each S-class results in a design spacings window (it is recommended that overall uniformity be at least 25%)

S–series of lighting classes

Class

Horizontal Illuminance

Average Illuminance Eav (lux) to fall between the values:

Minimum Point Illuminance Emin (lux)

S1 15 & 22.5 5

S2 10 & 15 3

S3 7.5 & 11.25 1.5

S4 5 & 7.5 1

S5 3 & 4.5 0.6

S6 2 & 3 0.6

CE-series of lighting classes

ClassHorizontal Illuminance

Average Illuminance Eav (lux) [minimum value] Overall Uniformity Uo [minimum value]

CE0 50 0.4

CE1 30 0.4

CE2 20 0.4

CE3 15 0.4

CE4 10 0.4

CE5 7.5 0.4

Criteria for selection of CE Classes Lighting classes for city and town centres

Type of traffic

Lighting Class

Normal Traffic Flow3 High Traffic Flow4

E3 E4 E3 E4

Pedestrian only CE3 CE2 CE2 CE1

Mixed vehicle & pedestrian CE2 CE1 CE1 CE1

CEN Code of Practice

Please note that BS EN 13201 makes no specific references to the lighting of car parks. BS 5489 : 2003 refers users to another standard, EN 12464-2, which is currently only in draft form. Therefore BS 5489 : Part 9 : 1996 remains valid for car park lighting.

Criteria for selection of ME-Classes Lighting classes for motorways and traffic routes

Hierarchy description

General description (see table B2 BS5489-1:2003)

Traffic flow (average daily traffic)

Lighting class

Motorway

Main carriageway in complex interchange areas≥40,000

ME1>40,000

Main carriageway with interchanges <3km≤40,000 ME2

>40,000 ME1

Main carriageway with interchanges ≥3km≤40,000

ME2>40,000

Emergency lanes – ME4a

Strategic route

Single and dual trunk and principal roads>40mph with few junctions and little pedestrian traffic

≤15,000 ME3a

>15,000 ME2

Main distributor

Single and dual major urban and inter-primary link roads, 40mph or less and with limited parking

≤15,000 ME3a

>15,000 ME2

Secondary distributor

Classified B and C class roads and unclassified urban bus routes with local traffic, frequent junctions and pedestrians

E1/E2

≤7,000 ME4a

7,000 to 15,000 ME3b

>15,000 ME3a

Urban areas with 30mph speed limits E3/E4

≤7,000 ME3c

7,000 to 15,000 ME3b

>15,000 ME2

Link roadSecondary distribution network with frontage access, frequent junctions and uncontrolled parking

E1/E2 Any ME5

E3Any ME4b

or S2High pedestrian and cycle use S1

CEN Code of Practice

ME–series of lighting classes

Class

Luminance of the dry road surface Disability glare Lighting of Surroundings

Average Luminance Lav (cd/m2)

[minimum value]

Overall Uniformity Uo

[minimum value]

Longitudinal Uniformity

UI [minimum value]

Threshold Increment

TI (%) [maximum value]

Surround Ratio

SR [minimum value]

ME1 2.0 0.4 0.7 10 0.5

ME2 1.5 0.4 0.7 10 0.5

ME3a 1.0 0.4 0.7 15 0.5

ME3b 1.0 0.4 0.6 15 0.5

ME3c 1.0 0.4 0.5 15 0.5

ME4a 0.75 0.4 0.6 15 0.5

ME4b 0.75 0.4 0.5 15 0.5

ME5 0.5 0.35 0.4 15 0.5

ME6 0.3 0.35 0.4 15 –

BS5489-1:2003 / BS EN 12464-2:2007

Lighting levels for outdoor car parks

Outdoor Car Park recommended lighting levelAverage Illuminance Eav (lux) [minimum value]

Overall Uniformity Uo (min) [minimum value]

Light traffic car parks (i.e. shops, apartments, cycle parks) Eav ≥ 5 lux Uo ≥ 0.25%

Medium traffic (i.e. departments stores, offices, sports facilities) Eav ≥ 10 lux Uo ≥ 0.25%

Heavy traffic (i.e. schools, churches, major sports facilities) Eav ≥ 20 lux Uo ≥ 0.25%

Lighting classes for conflict areas

Traffic route class Conflict area class

ME1 CE0

ME2 CE1

ME3 CE2

ME4 CE3

ME5 CE4

Reference information Environmental zones

Category Examples

E1 Intrinsically dark areas National Parks, Areas of Outstanding Natural Beauty, etc.

E2 Low district brightness areas Rural or small village locations

E3 Medium district brightness areas Small town centres or urban locations

E4 High district brightness areas Town/city centres with high levels of night-time activity

Adjoining schemes should be lit to within 2 categories of each other The above table helps identify this where the adjacent schemes are of different classes

Lighting classes for general areas

ME class CE class S class– CE0 –

ME1 CE1 –ME2 CE2 –ME3 CE3 S1ME4 CE4 S2ME5 CE5 S3ME6 – S4

– – S5– – S6



First digit IPX

The first digit (IPX-) classifies the protection of the luminaire against the penetration of solid bodies.

IP1 Protected against solid objects larger than 50mm Ø

IP2 Protected against solid objects larger than 12.5mm Ø

IP3 Protected against solid objects larger than 2.5mm Ø

IP4 Protected against solid objects larger than 1mm Ø

IP5 Protected against harmful dust ingress (dust protected)

IP6 Totally protected against any entry of dust (dust tight)

Second digit IP-X

The second digit (IP-X) classifies the protection of the luminaire against the penetration of liquids.

IP-1 Protected against vertical water droplets

IP-2 Protected against falling water droplets to a maximum of 15º from the vertical

IP-3 Protected against rain to a maximum of 60º to the vertical (rain proof)

IP-4 Protected against water sprays (splash proof)

IP-5 Protected against water jets (jet proof)

IP-6 Protected against powerful water jets

IP-7 Protected against the effects of temporary submersion in water

IP-8 Protected against the effects of permanent submersion in water

Level of shock resistance IK

Clarifies the protection of the luminaire against resistance to impact.

IK01 Protection against 0.14 Joules of impact energy










Ingress Protection & Shock Resistance

WEEE Directive & Energy Related Products

The degree of protection for luminaires against the penetration of dust, solid bodies and water, as defined in the Standard EN 60598-1, is represented by the initials IP followed by two characteristic digits, and may be represented by graphic symbols, e.g. IP 66.

The letters IK indicate the level of shock resistance of the luminaire to impact, according to EN 50102.

WEEE DirectiveThe WEEE Legislation – a step towards a better environment

Effective in the UK from the 1st July 2007, the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive (WEEE Directive) was implemented to ensure producers and agents take responsibility for the reduction of electrical and electronic waste into our landfill sites.

The directive aims to minimise the impact of electrical and electronic equipment on the environment by encouraging the design of products with their reuse, recycling and recovery in mind. It sets targets for the collection, treatment, recovery and environmentally sound disposal of electrical and electronic waste.

What are we doing about this legislation?

We are registered with the collective compliance scheme run by Lumicom, a not-for-profit organisation, established by the Lighting Industry Association (LIA), to manage the collection and responsible disposal of end of life lighting equipment.

We continue to design products that maximise long life, and where possible are upgradeable as new technologies emerge. Our product development procedures aim to use materials, designs and manufacturing processes that facilitate the treatment and recycling of our products.

DW Windsor registration: WEEE/JC0205VY

What’s the impact of the WEEE Directive on the professional lighting specifier/customer?

As a member of the Lumicom scheme DW Windsor pays a charge based on the type of luminaire purchased to cover the future disposal of the product. This ensures the end user is not liable for any future costs associated with the disposal of or recycling of the product. When the products need disposing of, at end of life, the end user simply needs to contact Lumicom directly, who will arrange for the correct disposal/recycling.

Web: lumicomrecycling.co.uk Tel: 0845 643 0304 Email: [email protected]

Further information on the WEEE Directive can be found at: berr.gov.uk lumicom.co.uk

ErP – Energy Related ProductsWhat is ErP and how does it affect lighting?

ErP is part of the Ecodesign directive introduced by the European Parliament, designed to tackle a product’s negative impact on the environment (where decisions are made concerning product performance). It details that consideration must be given to the entire life cycle of the product, including manufacture, installation, maintenance and disposal.

ErP Directive, regulation 245/2009 sets out manufacturers requirements for lamps, ballasts and luminaires. Manufacturers must now provide product information on suitable replacement parts.

What are we doing about this legislation?

DW Windsor is committed to engineering lighting solutions that maximise energy efficiency and product design life. Whilst we do not manufacture lamps or ballasts, we do sell them within our luminaires. Only lamps and ballasts that meet DW Windsor’s stringent performance criteria, and the requirements of the ErP Directive, are utilised within our products. Any suitable replacement parts may be identified under the luminaire maintenance section on our website.

How will this affect DW Windsor products in the future?

The regulations provide on-going withdrawal of the least efficient light sources, resulting in the removal of some lamp options available. A full list of lamp types that are currently used by DW Windsor can be found on pages 314 – 315.

For further information on maintenance and replacement parts for DW Windsor products, go to: www.dwwindsor.com/luminairemaintenance

Monoro LED Clacton Seafront


Technical Information 315314 Technical InformationLamp Characteristics There are a number of ways of assessing lamps, for example:

Colour Temperature Colour Temperature is a descriptive term for the appearance of light expressed in Kelvin.

Warm White is less than 3300K Neutral White is between 3300K and 5300K Cool White is greater than 5300K

To put this into context: The northern sky is around 10000K An overcast sky is around 7000K Noon on a sunny day is about 6000K Tungsten filament lamps are around 2700K A candle flame is around 2000K

Colour Rendering Index (Ra)

A measure of the light source’s ability to render the colours of objects as similar to those under a reference light source.

Ra Group Typical Application

90 – 100 1A Where accurate colour rendering is required (Colour matching)

80 – 89 1B Where good colour rendering is required (Accurate colour judgements)

70 – 79 2A Where moderate to good colour rendering is required

60 – 69 2B Where moderate colour rendering is required

40 – 59 3 Where colour rendering is of little significance but marked distortion of colour is unacceptable

20 – 39 4 Where colour rendering is unimportantCosmoPolis CPO-TW MT 6 45 4950 110 2800 66 PGZ12 60 7200 120 2800 73 PGZ12 90 10450 116 2880 66 PGZ12 140 16500 118 2880 66 PGZ12

CMH StreetWise CMH-SW MT 4 50 5000 100 3000 70 E27 70 7640 105 3000 70 E27 100 10900 109 3000 70 E40 150 16200 110 3000 68 E40

High Pressure Sodium Plus (Tubular) SON-T+ ST 4 50 4400 88 1950 20-39 E27 [enhanced output] 70 6500 93 1950 20-39 E27 100 10000 100 1950 20-39 E40 150 17500 117 1950 20-39 E40 250 33000 132 1950 20-39 E40 400 55500 139 1950 20-39 E40 600 90000 150 1950 20-39 E40

High Pressure Sodium Plus (Double Ended) SON-TD+ SD 2 70 6800 97 2000 20-39 RX7 [enhanced output] 150 15000 100 2000 20-39 RX7

Ceramic Metal Halide CDM-T MT 2 35 3300 94 2800 40-59 G12 70 6600 94 3000 80-89 G12 70 5800 83 4200 90-100 G12 150 14000 93 3000 80-89 G12 150 12700 85 4200 90-100 G12

Ceramic Metal Halide Elite CDM-TMW MT 4 210 24150 115 3000 90 PGZX18 210 23000 108 4000 92 PGZX18 315 38700 120 3000 90 PGZX18 315 35500 113 4000 93 PGZX18

Ceramic Metal Halide (Edison screw cap) CDO-ET ME 3 70 6300 90 2800 83 E27 100 8700 87 2800 85 E40 150 13500 90 2800 85 E40

Ceramic Metal Halide (Edison screw cap) CDO-TT MT 3 70 6300 90 2800 83 E27 100 9000 87 2800 85 E40 150 13500 90 2800 85 E40 250 22500 90 2800 85 E40

Quartz Metal Halide HPI-T MT 2 250 19000 76 4500 65 E40 400 35000 88 4300 65 E40 1000 85000 85 4300 65 E40 (220v) 2000 189000 95 4600 65 E40 (380v) 2000 200000 100 4200 65 E40

Quartz Metal Halide (Edison screw cap) HQI-E (E27) ME 2 50 3400 68 4000 65 E27 70 5600 80 4000 65 E27 70 5600 80 3200 65 E27 100 9000 90 4000 65 E27 100 9000 90 3200 65 E27 150 14000 93 4000 65 E27 150 13300 87 3200 65 E27 The above data is based on the clear elliptical lamp envelope

Similar performance clear tubular lamps are available

Quartz Metal Halide (Edison screw cap) HQI-T (E40) MT 2 400 36000 90 4000 65 E40 400 32000 80 5000 75 E40 600 55000 92 4000 65 E40 1000 90000 90 4000 65 E40 The above are clear tubular lamps NB Both the E27 and E40 HQI lamps above are compatible with

High Pressure Sodium control gear, but note the caps for 100W and 150W

Quartz Metal Halide (Double Ended) HQI-TS MD 2 70 5200 74 3000 70 RX7s 70 5500 79 4000 70 RX7s 70 4800 69 6500 90 RX7s 150 11250 75 4200 70 RX7s 150 11250 75 3000 70 RX7s 150 11250 75 6500 90 RX7s 250 20000 80 3000 70 Fc2 250 20000 80 4200 70 Fc2 400 36000 90 5200 90-100 Fc2 400 28000 80 5600 90-100 Fc2 400 35000 88 4200 80-89 Fc2 1000 80000 80 5200 65 RX7s 2000 240000 120 4500 65 cable

ILCOS codes Recommended Wattage Luminous Efficacy Colour Temp Colour Cap group change Flux Rendering interval years W lm lm/W K Ra

ILCOS codes Recommended Wattage Luminous Efficacy Colour Temp Colour Cap group change Flux Rendering interval years W lm lm/W K Ra

Master PL-L (Dulux L) PL-L FSDH 3 24 1800 75 2700 82 2G11 24 1800 75 3000 82 2G11 24 1800 75 3500 82 2G11 24 1800 75 4000 82 2G11 24 1800 75 6500 80 2G11 36 2900 81 2700 82 2G11 36 2900 81 3000 82 2G11 36 2900 81 3500 82 2G11 36 2900 81 4000 82 2G11 36 2900 81 6500 80 2G11 36 2200 90 3000 90 2G11 36 2400 80 5300 91 2G11 40 3500 88 3000 82 2G11 40 3500 88 3500 82 2G11 40 3500 88 4000 82 2G11 55 4800 87 3000 82 2G11 55 4800 87 3500 82 2G11 55 4800 87 4000 82 2G11 55 3700 87 3000 90 2G11 55 3800 87 5300 91 2G11 80 6000 75 2700 82 2G11 80 6000 75 3000 82 2G11 80 6000 75 3500 82 2G11 80 6000 75 4000 75 2G11

Master PL-C (Dulux D/E) [4 tube 2 pin] PL-C FSQ 2 10 600 60 2700 82 G24-d1 [4 pin variant (lamp holder G24q) also available] 10 600 60 3000 82 G24-d1 10 600 60 4000 82 G24-d1 13 900 69 2700 82 G24-d1 13 900 69 3000 82 G24-d1 13 900 69 4000 82 G24-d1 13 900 69 6500 80 G24-d1 18 1200 67 2700 82 G24-d2 18 1200 67 3000 82 G24-d2 18 1200 67 3500 82 G24-d2 18 1200 67 4000 82 G24-d2 18 1200 67 6500 80 G24-d2 26 1800 69 2700 82 G24-d3 26 1800 69 3000 82 G24-d3 26 1800 69 3500 82 G24-d3 26 1800 69 4000 82 G24-d3 26 1800 69 6500 80 G24-d3

Master PL-T (Dulux T/E) PL-T FSM 2 18 1200 67 4000 82 GX24q-2 [triple U tube 4 pin] 18 1200 67 3000 82 GX24q-2 18 1200 67 2700 82 GX24q-2 26 1800 69 4000 82 GX24q-3 26 1800 69 3000 82 GX24q-3 26 1800 69 2700 82 GX24q-3 FSMH 32 2400 75 4000 82 GX24q-3 32 2400 75 3000 82 GX24q-3 32 2400 75 2700 82 GX24q-3 42 3200 76 4000 82 GX24q-4 42 3200 76 3000 82 GX24q-4 42 3200 76 2700 82 GX24q-4 57 4300 75 4000 82 GX24q-5 57 4300 75 3000 82 GX24q-5 57 4300 75 2700 82 GX24q-5

2D [4 pin] 2D FSD 3 28 2050 73 3500 80-89 GR10 38 2850 75 3500 80-89 GR10

Lamp DataLamp Data



GlossaryAccent lighting The highlighting of individual features

Adaption The process whereby eyesight adjusts to relative levels of brightness, e.g. daytime or night time

Arc tube That part of a discharge lamp that emits the light

Asymmetric reflector A reflector that distributes light differentially in specific directions

Baffle A shield type of apparatus to prevent light spill from a luminaire

Ballast An electrical component used with discharge lamps to balance the light output and electrical current consumption

Beam angle The angle over which the intensity from a reflector drops to half of the peak value

Candela A measure of luminous intensity from a lamp

Cap The part of the lamp that connects to the lamp holder

Colour appearance The relative perception of warmth of light, warm, intermediate or cool. (See also correlated colour temperature)

Colour rendering index (CRI) The relative ability of a light source to enable the identification of colour

Correlated colour temperature (CCT) The numeric expression of colour appearance, expressed in Kelvin

Contrast The subjective appearance of different levels of lighting within the visual field

DALI Stands for Digital Addressable Lighting Interface and is a standardised communication protocol used with electronic control gear such as LED Drivers. Many CMS systems use DALI interface to communicate with street lighting equipment

Diamond Optic® Award winning adjustable reflector system that tailors light distribution to the area to be lit. See pages 28 – 31

Diffuse lighting Lighting that emanates in many directions with no peak intensity in any given direction

Diffuser Translucent or frosted glazing that engenders a more even light distribution

Direct entry luminaire Luminaire where the connection between it and the column is via an offset spigot

Direct lighting Lighting where the target area is lit directly from the luminaire rather than via another surface

Disability glare Light that adversely affects one’s ability to undertake a given visual task

Discomfort glare Light that makes a given visual task uncomfortable

DMX A digital communication protocol used in lighting to allow numbers of products to be controlled by one main source. This allows colour changing, dimming and switching of architectural products to create a wide range of interesting lighting effects

Downward light output ratio (DLOR) That proportion of the total light emitted by a luminaire that shines downwards

Easy-fit™ connector The preferred connector between a pendant luminaire and its bracket that resolves all the problems associated with the more dated screw type connectors

Electronic control gear An electrical device in discharge lamp circuits that supplants the ballast, igniter and capacitor in conventional circuits

Fluorescent lamp A low intensity discharge lamp with phosphor coating to modify the wavelength of emitted light

Full cut off luminaire Expression for luminaires where there is an absolute cut off of light above the horizontal. For further information on G4, G5 and G6 glare ratings see EN 13201

Glare That light emitted by a luminaire that has an adverse effect on a given visual task

Group lamp change The recommended policy for lamp changes whereby all of the lamps for a given project or area are changed together, whether still functional or not, on a periodic cycle

High intensity discharge lamp (HID) Lamp where the arc tube contains gas at a relatively high pressure

High pressure sodium lamp (SON) A high intensity discharge lamp where the main active ingredient is sodium. These lamps have a relatively poor colour rendering, but are very efficient, robust, long lived and easily aimed in a quality reflector system such as Diamond Optic®

Ignitor That component in a conventional HID lamp circuit that is responsible for initiating the arc in the arc tube

Integrating sphere Testing equipment which measures various aspects of light output including total luminous flux, colour temperature and colour rendering index. It allows more accurate data to be collected from products which utilise LED as their light source

IP rating Is a two digit number that defines the relative ingress protection of a product. Further information on this can be found on page 313

Illuminance The measure of light arriving at a given point. Measured in lux and represented by the symbol E

Isolux diagram A diagram showing the light distribution on a surface by means of contour type lines where each contour joins points of like illuminance

Junction temperature (Tj) Is the temperature measured at the point where an LED creates the emitted light. It is important to keep the junction temperature as low as possible in order to gain the expected longevity stated for the product

Lamp The generic term for a light source or light bulb

Lamp holder That part of a luminaire to which the lamp’s cap is affixed

Lamp life With HID lamps this is the expected duration in which 50% of a batch is expected to fail under test conditions

LED Light Emitting Diode. A solid state light source

LED driver Required by LED products to control the electrical supply to banks of LEDs. This can be adapted to provide specific pre-set drive currents which allow controllability of the products light output and wattage

Light That part of the electromagnetic spectrum that is visible to humans

Light output ratio (LOR) The proportion of light emitted by the luminaire against that emitted by the light source within the luminaire

Light pollution More properly known as obtrusive light. It is that light that is spilled in undesired directions, and/or causing undesired effects

Light source See Lamp

Longitudinal uniformity ratio (Ul) The minimum point luminance divided by the average luminance in any row of calculated points between two lighting positions in a street lighting design. Under BS5489-1:2003 the lowest of these is used in assessing the project

Louvre An optical controller consisting of a number of blades arranged to obstruct and/or redirect light output from a luminaire

Luminaire Technical term for a light fitting or lantern

Luminance The measure of brightness of a surface. Measured in Candelas per metre square (cd/m2) and represented by the symbol L

Luminous efficacy The ratio of light output of a light source against the electricity consumed. Measured in lumens per watt [lm/w]

Lux Unit of measurement for illuminance

L70 Is the term used for predicted lifetime of an LED chip to the point at which it still produces 70% of the initial luminous flux. This figure is used to calculate the yearly light loss from the product and is a good guide as to the general longevity of the complete product

Maintained illuminance Measurement of light arriving at a given point after maintenance factors have been taken into account

Maintenance factor A multiplier used to downgrade the calculated light output from a luminaire that takes into account light degradation from the light source and the increasing accumulation of dirt on the luminaire

Maintained lighting principle Current best practice calls for lighting design to simulate the results that would be expected in a project at the worst snapshot in time. This equates to just prior to lamp change and luminaire cleaning for most values except glare which is calculated for when the luminaire is clean and the lamp new

Mesopic vision A state of human visual performance that equates to brightness levels between scotopic and photopic vision. i.e. at levels where colour and focussed vision begins to fail and monochromatic peripheral vision is starting up

Metal halide lamp An HID lamp where the active ingredients within the arc tube come from the halide family of elements. Currently there are two types of metal halide lamp available: those with quartz arc tubes and those with ceramic arc tubes

Narrow beam reflector A symmetrical reflector with a beam spread typically less than 25°

Obtrusive light More accurate terminology for light pollution

Obtrusive light shields (OLS) A range of shields that can be applied to luminaires to reduce or eliminate light distribution in given directions

Overall uniformity ratio (Uo) The minimum point illuminance or luminance divided by the average illuminance or luminance in a project or target area

Pendant luminaire A luminaire that is suspended via an entry in its top surface

Photoelectric control unit (PECU) or photocell A light sensitive switch

Photopic vision Human visual response at relatively high brightness levels, i.e. daytime adapted vision. This is colour vision and is also associated with focussed vision

Post top luminaire A luminaire with the mechanical entry for the column or bracket being on the under surface

Projection The distance from the centre of the column (for column brackets or surface of wall for wall brackets) to the point of entry of the luminaire except for pendant or post top type luminaires where it is to the centre point of the luminaire

Reflectance The relative degree to which a surface reflects light

Remote monitoring Technology that allows luminaires to be assessed and usually switched from a location remote from the luminaires themselves

RGB A method of colour changing which combines red, green and blue colours mixed in differing amounts to create the various colours available

Semi cylindrical illuminance Measure of light that falls on a vertically oriented half cylinder. This is usually measured at 1.5m above ground level to simulate light falling on a human face

Scotopic vision Human visual response associated with very low levels of light. It is also monochromatic vision and mostly peripheral rather than focussed. See also photopic and mesopic vision

Side entry luminaire Luminaire where the support bracket enters the luminaire from one side

Spill light Light from a luminaire that has no intended illuminating purpose, usually associated with light pollution, although can be used intentionally for decorative purposes

Surround ratio Under BS EN13201 this is a specific term for the ratio of a 5m wide strip of land outside either side of the road compared to 5m strips within each side of the roadway. (NB for roadways of less than 10m overall width the strips are reduced to be accommodated

Symmetric reflector Reflector where the light reflected is symmetrically distributed about a vertical axis through it

Threshold increment [ti %] Relative measure of loss of visibility in a roadway caused by glare

Uniformity Measure of evenness of the light distribution on a lit surface. Mathematically it is the minimum point divided by the average values

Uplighter A type of luminaire designed to emit light in an upwards direction

Upward light output ratio (ULOR) That proportion of light emitted by a luminaire above the horizontal compared with the light output of the light source. NB Sometimes the term Upward Waste Light Ratio (UWLR) is used

Windage area The projected area, usually of the luminaire plus brackets used to calculate wind resistance when specifying an appropriate column



IndexIndex

Garda Hyde Park Corner, London

About DW Windsor 1 – 47

Akord Bullet 86 – 87

Akord Cone 86 – 87

Anello LED 166 – 167

Aventis 212 – 213

Barosa 78 – 79

Berkeley 118 – 119

Braemar 138 – 139

Camaro 66 – 73

Cannon 244 – 245

Capra 178 – 183

Capra-Compact 178 – 185

Capra-Mini 178 – 181

Cassia LED 186 – 187

CEN Code of Practice 310 – 311

Central Management System (CMS) 24 – 27

Colada 248 – 249

Colada LED 248 – 249

Column Brackets 279 – 283

Column Enhancements: Banners, Festive Decorations, Baskets and CCTV 276 – 277

Column Technical Details 272 – 273

Columns 256 – 292

Columns – Special 266 – 269

Columns – Standard 260 – 265

Columns & Brackets – Painting 270 – 271

Control & Dim 24 – 27

Corvus 104 – 105

CPD Seminars 13

Cradle 98 – 99

Crieff 102 – 103

DIALux 14

Diamond Optic® 28 – 31

Dover 96 – 97

DW400 146 – 147

Easy-fit™ 100

Ely 124 – 127

EN 40 Column Standard 290 – 291

Energy Related Products (ErP) 312

Eton 244 – 245

Evora 58 – 65

Evora LED 58 – 63

Excel 94 – 95

Feeder Pillars 288 – 289

Finials 284 – 285

Floodlight Brackets 254 – 255

Forza 88 – 89

Garda 216 – 221

GE StreetWise™ 22 – 23

General Conditions of Trading 320

Glossary 316 – 317

Harvard LeafNut 26 – 27

Hatfield 132 – 133

Henley 140 – 141

How-to Illuminate Areas using Garda LED Handrail 220 – 221

Iffley 130 – 131

Illuminated Finials 284 – 285

Ingress Protection 313

Integrating Sphere 16 – 17

ISO Standards 11

Knightsbridge 114 – 115

Kona 202 – 203

Lago 226 – 227

Lamp Data 314 – 315

Lancaster 112 – 113

LED Light Engine 32 – 33

Light Point 168 – 171

Light Pollution 304 – 305

Light Spill – Minimising 304 – 305

Lighting Car Parks 302 – 303

Lighting Design Services 13

Lighting Façades 296 – 297

Lighting Landscapes 294 – 295

Lighting Pedestrian Crossings 298 – 301

Lighting Statues and Monuments 296 – 297

Lighting the Vertical 294 – 295

Luca 196 – 197

LX1 Luminance Optic 34 – 35

Lyra 188 – 189

Malo LED 194 – 195

Manhattan 82 – 83

Mano LED 190 – 191

Meridian 148 – 149

Mesopic Vision 19

Milano 44 – 51

Monaro 52 – 57

Monaro LED II 52 – 55

Monza 192 – 193

New Products 6 – 9

Newport 136 – 137

Nexus 240 – 241

Obtrusive Light Shields 305

Paint Colours Inside Front Cover Flap

Pall Mall 116 – 117

Part Night Dim 24 – 25

Part Night Switch 24 – 25

Pedestals 278

Petra 176 – 177

Pharola 228 – 229

Pharola-Max 230 – 231

Pharola-Wall 200 – 201

Philips CosmoPolis 20 – 21

Polar 98 – 99

Polar (bollard) 242 – 243

Portea LED 172 – 173

Portland 118 – 119

Products at a Glance 4 – 5

Raise & Lower Columns 274 – 275

Refurbishment & Replicas 38 – 39

Reno 198 – 199

Renza LED 174 – 175

Retrofit LED 32 – 33

Riga 240 – 241

Rio 80 – 81

Road Lantern 144 – 145

Rona 238 – 239

Sabre 252 – 253

Salisbury 136 – 137

Scotopic/Photopic Ratios 19

Shock Resistance 313

Silka 232 – 235

Silka-Max 236 – 237

Solar & Wind 152 – 157

Sorento 74 – 77

Special Structures 258 – 259

Specifying Products from our Catalogue Inside Front Cover Flap

Strand B & C 122 – 123

Stratum 92 – 93

Tatra 210 – 211

Tizona 250 – 251

Toro 150 – 151

Toronto 84 – 85

Trebem 224 – 225

Unique Solutions 36 – 37

Urban Furniture 40 – 41

Using Ground Recessed Luminaires 294 – 295

Vaio LED 160 – 165

Vector 242 – 243

Vertica 206 – 207

Vertica LED 204 – 205

Visualisations 12 – 13

Wall Brackets 286 – 287

Warwick 134 – 135

Waterford 138 – 139

WEEE Directive 312

Westminster 116 – 117

White Light 18 – 23

Wildlife Considerations 306 – 307

Windsor 110 – 111

York 134 – 135

Zebra Products 300 – 301

General Conditions of Trading320

1. GENERAL In these General Conditions of Sale the “Company means D.W. Windsor Limited, the “goods” mean any item of whatsoever nature which is to be sold by the Company, the “Purchaser” means the person, firm or body corporate which buys or has agreed to buy the goods.

These General Conditions of Sale shall apply to and form part of every contract or sale entered into by the Company. All orders are accepted and executed on the understanding that the Purchaser is bound by these General Conditions of Sale. Where there is any inconsistency between these General Conditions of Sale and any conditions which the Purchaser seeks to impose, these General Conditions of Sale shall prevail.

No contract of sale shall come into being unless and until the Purchaser has accepted these General Conditions of Sale either expressly or by implication.

2. LIMITS OF CONTRACT The contract includes only such goods as are specified in the quotation or acknowledgement accompanying these General Conditions of Sale.

3. PRICES a) The price payable for goods shall unless otherwise stated by the Company in writing

be the list price of the Company current at the date of despatch and in the case of an order for delivery by instalments the price payable for each instalment shall be the list price of the Company current at the date of despatch of such instalment.

b) Unless otherwise expressly stated to be firm for a period the Company’s prices are subject to variation to take account of variations in wages, materials and other costs. The Company accordingly reserves the right to adjust the invoice price without notice by the amount of any increase or decrease in such costs after the price is quoted.

c) All prices are exclusive of Value Added Tax, customs duties or other statutory taxes and this will be charged additionally at the applicable rate and recoverable as part of the amount due from the purchaser by the Company.

4. PAYMENT a) Unless otherwise agreed in writing, payment is due in full by the end of the month

following the month of invoice.

b) Where the Contract is to be or may be fulfilled in separate instalments, deliveries or parts, payment for each instalment, delivery or part shall be made as if the same constituted a separate contract.

c) Time for payment shall be of the essence of the contract.

d) Without prejudice to any other rights it may have, whether under the Late Payment of Commercial Debts (Interest) Act 1988 or otherwise, the Company is entitled to charge interest at 4% above the current base rate of Natwest Bank Plc on overdue payments of the price of the goods or the price of any instalment or partial delivery thereof.

e) Additionally and without prejudice to its other rights the Company shall be entitled to recover all direct expenses reasonably incurred by the Company in collecting or attempting to collect amounts of the price outstanding.

f) If the Purchaser fails to make any payment when due in accordance with these General Conditions of Sale, the Company reserves the right in its absolute discretion and without prejudice to any of its other rights or remedies to suspend all further deliveries until such payment has been made in full or, at the Company’s option, to cancel the balance of the order. In either case the Company shall hold the Purchaser liable for costs incurred in respect of goods in course of manufacture or ready for despatch.

g) The Company shall be entitled to bring an action for the price or part thereof whether or not the property in the goods has passed.

5. CREDIT Any contract shall be subject to the Company being satisfied as to the Purchaser’s credit references, and without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing, the Company may (in its absolute discretion), having informed the Purchaser that the goods are ready for despatch, refrain from delivering the goods until such time as the Purchaser tenders the purchase money to the Company together with any outstanding amounts which may be due to the Company on any account whatsoever.

6. CARRIAGE In all cases the prices are exclusive of carriage and insurance to the Purchaser’s premises unless otherwise agreed in writing at the time of order.

7. PACKING All lanterns are despatched in protective cartons, but where it is necessary to despatch goods in crates, cases, pallets, stillages or skids or other such packaging, a charge will be made for this. Unless otherwise specified this amount will be credited in full on the return, within one month, of such crates, skids, stillages and pallets etc. in good condition carriage paid. No charge is made for any other form of packaging and no credit will be allowed for its return.

8. LOSS OR DAMAGE IN TRANSIT When the total price quoted includes delivery, the Company shall repair or replace free of charge goods damaged in transit or not delivered in accordance with the Advice Note provided that the Company is given written notification of such damage or non delivery within such time (being not more than 7 days) as will enable the Company to comply with the carrier’s conditions of carriage as affecting loss or damage in transit, or, where delivery is made by the Company’s own transport within 14 days after receipt of the Advice Note. Notwithstanding the above undertaking, the Company will only consider claims for alleged shortage if they are received within two working days of the receipt of the goods by the Purchaser together with sufficient information to enable the Company properly to identify the shortage including the Advice Note number, case number and condition of case.

9. SAMPLES Any samples submitted with the Company’s quotation or at the Purchaser’s request must be returned within sixty days of receipt and the Company shall be entitled to charge for them if they are not so returned.

10. DELIVERY a) All times or dates for delivery of the goods are given in good faith but are approximate

only and shall not be of the essence of the contract.

b) All times or dates for delivery shall be calculated from the date of acceptance by the Company of the order of the Purchaser, or from the date of receipt by the Company from the Purchaser of all information, instructions and drawings as shall be necessary to enable the Company to carry out the order, whichever shall be the later.

c) Unless otherwise stated in writing the Company shall be entitled to make partial deliveries of the goods.

d) The Company shall not be liable in any way whatsoever for the consequences whether direct or indirect of any delay in delivery or in the carrying out of any work of the contract.

11. VARIATIONS a) The Company shall be under no obligation to alter or vary any part of the contract

or any work connected therewith. Any alteration to or addition to or amendment or other variation of the specification, including any increase or decrease in the quality of the goods or any alteration to any drawings or to the quality, performance, weight or measurements of any goods or any alteration or variation of advised delivery schedules, shall, if requested by the Purchaser, be subject to the agreement of the Company, with such alteration or addition to the price and to delivery dates or schedules as may be required by the Company, and shall not be binding upon the Company unless and until accepted by the Company in writing.

b) In the event of any variation or suspension of the work by the Purchaser’s instructions or lack of instructions the Company shall be entitled to adjust the contract price to reflect costs involved, and to adjust delivery dates or schedules.

12. STORAGE If the Company does not receive forwarding instructions sufficient to enable it to despatch the goods within fourteen days after notification that the goods are ready for delivery or that they have been tested under Clause 14, the Purchaser shall thereupon take delivery or arrange for storage. If the Purchaser does not take delivery or arrange for storage as aforesaid, the Company shall be entitled to invoice and be paid for the goods as though the goods had been duly delivered in accordance with these General Conditions of Sale and the Company may arrange storage either at the Company’s own works or elsewhere on the Purchaser’s behalf and all charges for storage, insurance or demurrage shall be payable by the Purchaser.

13. PERFORMANCE Any performance figures given by the Company are based on its experience and are such as the Company expects to obtain under the conditions of its standard tests at its work.

14. INSPECTION AND TESTS The Company’s products are carefully inspected, and, where practicable submitted to its standard tests at the Company’s works before despatch. If tests other than those specified or tests in the presence of the Purchaser or its representatives are required, these will be charged for. In the event of any delay on the Purchaser’s part in attending tests after the Purchaser has received 7 days notice that the Company is ready to perform the tests, the tests will proceed in the Purchaser’s absence and the Purchaser accordingly agrees herein to accept and pay for such tests as if they had been performed in the Purchaser’s presence.

15. DESCRIPTIVE MATTER AND ILLUSTRATIONS All descriptions and illustrations and particulars of weights and dimensions issued by the Company in catalogues, price lists, advertising matter and forwarding specifications are by way of general descriptions and approximate only, and shall not form part of any contract or give rise to any liability on the part of the Company.

It is the policy of the Company to endeavour to develop and improve its products, and accordingly the Company reserves the right to change all specifications without prior notification or public announcement pursuant to such policy. Provided that nothing in this Clause shall oblige the Purchaser to accept goods which do not substantially comply with the contract.

16. WARRANTY a) The Company will make good by repair or at the Company’s option by the supply of a

replacement defects which, under proper storage and use appear in the goods within the period of twelve calendar months after the goods have been delivered and arise solely from faulty design (other than design made or furnished by the Purchaser), materials or workmanship.

b) The Warranty given in this Clause is subject to the following provisos namely

i) That the Purchaser shall have followed all instructions issued by the Company in relation to the goods.

ii) That in the case of defects which would have been reasonably apparent to the Purchaser on reasonable examination of the goods on delivery, the Purchaser shall notify the Company of the defects in writing within fourteen working days of delivery.

iii) That in the case of any other defects, the Purchaser shall notify the Company of the defects in writing within seven days of the date when the defect becomes apparent.

iv) Where in discharge of its obligations under the Warranty given in this Clause the Company agrees that the Purchaser may undertake any repair or remedial work on its behalf, the cost of such work shall be agreed in writing between the Purchaser and the Company before the commencement of any such repair or remedial work.

17. REJECTION Unless otherwise agreed in writing and subject to Clause 16 hereof (WARRANTY), goods rejected as not complying with the contract must be rejected within fourteen working days of delivery to the Purchaser’s premises or such other place as the Purchaser shall have specified.

18. RETURN OF GOODS In no circumstances may goods supplied against a firm order be returned without the Purchaser having first applied for and obtained the written consent of the Company. A handling charge may be deducted from any credit allowed by the Company where it is established that the reason for the return of goods was not the subject of Clause 8 hereof or due to any error on the part of the Company.

19. CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS Save as may be expressly provided for herein the Company shall not be liable for any consequential loss suffered by the Purchaser, and in particular the Company shall not be liable for any costs claims or damages or expenses arising out of any tortious act or omission or any breach of contract or statutory duty calculated by reference to profits income production or accruals or by reference to accrual of such costs claims damages or expenses on a time basis.

20. PATENTS The Purchaser will indemnify the Company against all damage penalties costs losses and expenses suffered by the Company or for which it may become liable in respect of the infringement of any intellectual property including (but without limitation) any patent copyright registered design trade mark name or know-how arising out of the Company’s manufacture of goods in accordance with any specification design drawings or other data supplied by the Purchaser or its servants or agents.

21. COPYRIGHT All drawing descriptions and other information submitted by the Company shall remain the property of the Company together with the copyright therein.

22. FORCE MAJEURE AND OTHER CIRCUMSTANCES The Company shall be entitled without liability on its part and without prejudice to its other rights, to terminate the contract or any unfulfilled part thereof, or at its option to suspend or make partial deliveries or extend the time or times for delivery, if the manufacture of the goods by the Company or Company’s suppliers, or the delivery of the goods or the performance by the Company of any of its obligations under the contract is hindered or delayed whether directly or indirectly by reason of the Purchaser failing to furnish necessary instructions or information, or by war or other hostilities, civil commotion, act of God, government action or legislation, interruption of transport, strike, lock out or other form of industrial action, accidents or stoppages to works, shortage of labour, materials, equipment, fuel or power, breakdown of machinery or any other cause whatsoever beyond the reasonable control of the Company or its sub-contractors whether or not such cause exists at the date of the order.

23. PASSING OF PROPERTY AND RISK a) The risk in the goods shall pass to the Purchaser immediately on delivery of the goods

to the Purchaser.

b) The property in the goods shall remain with the Company, which reserves the right to dispose of the goods until payment in full for all the goods has been received by it in accordance with the terms of this contract or until such time as the Purchaser sells the goods to its customers by way of bona fide sale at full market value in the ordinary course of business. While the goods remain the property of the Company the Purchaser shall keep the goods identifiable and separate from all other goods in its possession. Not withstanding the foregoing, the Purchaser shall be responsible for insuring the goods at his expense following dispatch / delivery.

c) Until such payment as aforesaid has been received in full by the Company the Purchaser shall be under an obligation to redeliver the goods to the Company if the Company so requires and the Company shall be entitled at any time to retake possession of the goods and for that purpose to enter upon any land or premises of the Purchaser where the goods may be for the time being. The Company shall be entitled, where the goods have been fixed or attached to any other product, to detach the goods in order to recover possession of them. Such redelivery or retaking of possession shall be without prejudice to the obligation of the Purchaser to purchase the goods.

d) If the Purchaser sells any of the goods before the property in the goods has passed to the Purchaser, the Purchaser shall hold the proceeds of such sale in trust for the Company. The Purchaser shall, at the request of the Company, assign to the Company its rights to receive the proceeds of such sale.

24. In the event of the Purchaser committing any breach of this contract, or if any distress or execution is levied upon the Purchaser, his goods or assets, or if the Purchaser enters into any negotiations for arrangement or composition with or for the benefit of his creditors or commits any act of bankruptcy or, if any petition in bankruptcy shall be presented against him, or if, being a corporate body the Purchaser shall be wound up or if any resolution is proposed or petition presented to wind up the Purchaser (not being a members voluntary winding up for the purpose of reconstruction or amalgamation without insolvency), or if a receiver of the Purchaser’s assets or undertaking or any part thereof shall be appointed or if the Purchaser shall be deemed to be unable to pay its debts, the Company shall be entitled, without prejudice to any other claim or right or remedy which it may have, forthwith to suspend any or all deliveries until the default has been made good or to determine the contract or any unfulfilled part thereof.

25. DISPUTE RESOLUTION a) Negotiation between Executives

The parties shall attempt in good faith to resolve any dispute arising out of or relating to this Agreement promptly by negotiation. Any party may give the other party written notice of any dispute not resolved in the normal course. Within fifteen (15) days after delivery of the notice, the receiving party shall submit to the other a written response. The notice and response shall include (i) a statement of each party’s position, and (ii) the name and title of the representative for that party.

Within thirty (30) days after delivery of the disputing party’s notice, the representatives of the parties shall meet as often as they reasonably deem necessary to attempt to resolve the dispute. If the matter has not been resolved by these persons within sixty (60) days of the disputing party’s notice or if the parties fail to meet within thirty (30) days, either party may initiate Mediation.

b) Mediation

If the dispute has not been resolved by negotiation as provided herein, the parties shall endeavour to settle the dispute by Mediation under the then current Centre for Dispute Resolution (CEDR) rules for mediation of business disputes. The neutral third party will be selected from the CEDR panel unless the parties agree otherwise.

c) Litigation

If the dispute has not been resolved by non-binding means as provided herein within ninety (90) days of the initiation of such procedure, either party may initiate litigation subject to the provisions of this Agreement (upon thirty (30) days’ written notice to the other party), provided, however, that if one party has requested the other to participate in a non-binding procedure and the other has failed to participate, the requesting party may initiate litigation before expiration of the above period.

26. All contracts to which these General Conditions of Sale apply shall be governed by and construed in accordance with English Law.

These conditions of trading are correct at time of going to press. Please check our current terms and conditions on our website: www.dwwindsor.com

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lighting | Issue 4

www.dwwindsor.com

www.dwwindsor.com

Contact numbersGeneral Enquiries:T: 01992 474600F: 01992 474601E: [email protected]

Dedicated product advice:E: [email protected]

If you have a question about our products please contact us using our dedicated email address for an answer within twenty-four hours (Monday to Friday)

Please open this fl ap for our handy guide to specifyingour products

Products at a glanceSee pages 4 - 5 for a visual indexof all our products

New productsSee pages 6 - 9 for some of ourlatest innovative products

Akord Bullet 86Akord Cone 86Anello LED 166Aventis 212Barosa 78Berkeley 118Braemar 138Camaro 66Cannon 244Capra 182Capra-Compact 184Capra-Mini 180Cassia LED 186Colada 248Colada LED 248Columns 256Corvus 104Cradle 98Crieff 102Dover 96DW400 146Ely 124Eton 244Evora 58Evora LED 62Excel 94Forza 88Garda 214Hatfi eld 132Henley 140Iffl ey 130Knightsbridge 114Kona 202Lago 226Lancaster 112LED Light Engine 32Light Point 168Luca 196Lyra 188Malo LED 194Manhattan 82Mano LED 190Meridian 148Milano 44

Monaro 52Monaro LED II 54Monza 192Newport 136Nexus 240Pall Mall 116Petra 176Pharola 228Pharola-Max 230Pharola-Wall 200Polar 98Polar (bollard) 242Portea LED 172Portland 118Reno 198Renza LED 174Riga 240Rio 80Road Lantern 144Rona 238Sabre 252Salisbury 136Silka 232Silka-Max 236Solar & Wind 152Sorento 74Strand A & A Plus 120Strand B & C 122Stratum 92Tatra 210Tizona 250Toro 150Toronto 84Trebem 224Vaio LED 160Vector 242Vertica 206Vertica LED 204Warwick 134Waterford 138Westminster 116Windsor 110York 134

Prod

uct

inde

x

DW Windsor Limited is a member of DW Group Holdings Limited © DW Windsor 2012

DW Windsor LightingPindar Road, HoddesdonHertfordshire. EN11 0DX

T: 01992 474600F: 01992 474601E: [email protected]

folds

folds

ContemporaryClassicTraditionalFunctionalSolar & WindArchitecturalLED HandrailIlluminated BollardsFloodlightingColumns & Brackets

DWW2012_Cover_OUTER_AW.indd 1 05/11/2012 11:59

Dw windsor exterior lighting catalogue issue 4

Documents

evora led

monaro led

vertica led

colada led

anello led

malo led

cassia led

vaio led